Home

DomuS3D® Pegasus User Guide 1

1. r r re DomuS3D Antares InstallShield Wizard H DomuS3D Antares InstallShield Wizard Measure unit Destination Folder Please select the measure unit Click Next to install to this folder or dick Change to install to a different folder Install DomuS3D Antares to poet C Program Files DomuS3D Antares I Milimeters Inches InstallShield InstallShield With the second step you will A read and accept license agreement B decide which unit measure to use in the English setup only In any case unit measure can also be changed later on inside the program C decide the folder on the disk where to save the program folder D start the installation of the program files If upgrading from recent previous versions you can also decide whether or not to import catalogues projects from previous DomuS3D versions available on the computer 4 Atthe end of the setup procedure plug the hardware key in one of the available USB ports BE CAREFUL hardware key is the program license itself Keep it with extreme care as if you will lose it NO replacement key will be given In that unpleasant case you will need to buy a secondary key from the Manufacturer DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 17 Introduction Available languages Available languages for installation are English French German Italian Russian Czech Romanian Portuguese Hungarian Hebrew Persian Greek Serbian Croatian
2. Modify items details If you want to change some elements details just once and save it again in the library catalogues you can double click the element preview image that you see in the components window By double clicking the preview image with the left mouse button the Application will show you the element details mask where to change item code description price standard elevation from the floor etc Click the Modify button if you want to scale or resize the object or even if you want to assign some materials to the available layers Remember that those modifications affect the item available in the Application library not the one s already present in the project Materials Check existing If you need to remember which materials have been assigned to an object you can do as follows Open the Layout window click the right mouse button on one of the object lines and select command Properties As you access the properties mask of the object go the Materials section as you can see in the next image Measures Maleris podi I Miscellaneous Matenals ta DRO A E ANCO LUCIE CLES FALL BABERE oF audio CHARO OP petra ba E aio CACO VETERO SATINATO TRASP o birt DRIGO CHLAR A w Material names are language independent and usually are the names given by the designer of the 3D object If you can t understand which is which click the Show button and select Selected class option in this way the Application wil
3. 74 Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials Single wall with a single tile solid pattern The same tiling concept you saw in paragraph Tile all walls with a single tile Solid pattern can be used with one wall only In case you want to tile 1 wall only click the right mouse button on that wall and select command Activate laying Note if you do not see Activate laying command probably you did not select TILES section in the Components window Once the wall has been activated any drag amp drop and strip operation will be related to that wall only Moreover by enabling the single wall Application will let you see the strips height directly on the screen as you can see in the next image Click right mouse or ESC keyboard button in order to stop working on that wall A FAV VAY AE ee You can do something similar working in the Wall window It is a 2D window where you can see any surface in front see next image You can open the Wall window by double clicking the left mouse button on a wall in Layout window or starting from Navigation where you can click the right mouse button over the wall and select command Modify tiling If you right click on the wall while in the Wall window you can find the same commands in order to customize layout starinta Neate be No brientet tobe athe anh pete Sah ped onl el PL E elem fe Dorlas on foto empente ates ta aon oe oon te lt riba og pe polaron pad alia hn lenge alg E E bah aN a an
4. Version Pegasus DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide DomuS3D Pegasus User Manual Published by Maticad s r l Copyright 2014 by Maticad s r l Copyright 2014 by Maticad srl All rights reserved No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system without written permission from the author Maticad s r l reserves the right to make any modification or improvement to its products whenever necessary This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publishing Any information contained in this manual can be subject to modification without prior warning or communication Maticad s r l cannot be held responsible in any way towards third parties for exceptional damages side effects accidental direct or indirect damages or resulting from and relating to the purchase or use of this product DomuS3D Maticad mental ray V Ray Microsoft Apple Adobe Adobe Acrobat Adobe PhotoShop iPAD SQL Server 3DConnexion SafeNET Google SketchUp are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies v 2 1 Last revision 23 April 2014 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide Congrats you and your DomuS3D Pegasus were made for each other Thank you for joining us and welcome on board Dear Customer Let me warmly thank you for choosing DomuS3D As you al
5. 10 000 00 Subdivs o Remember to disable Portal Light in case you are rendering a room by night DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 102 Chapter 5 Rendering Materials and the rendering in V Ray Materials for objects and furnishing elements The correct choice of materials wood metal marble etc to be assigned to 3D objects together with the correct light setup are the basis in order to create a stunning image If you are using objects downloaded through DomuS3D Live page with the catalogues download service materials and layers are already set up in the best way so that you do not have to take care of anything more than placing them in the object Standard users normally do not manage materials as they use objects from the standard library or they assign new materials choosing them among a predefined and well formatted library in the components window if you are one of them you can avoid reading this paragraph But if you want to create new materials and textiles or if you are loading your own 3D objects and you need to dress them it is important to know how to modify the way colors and textures affect the rendering Even if V Ray can render using mental ray materials the best quality can be reached by using V Ray compatible materials which are slightly different this is the appropriate way of working in order to use all the power and features of the engine as well as to maximize lights effects and control reflectio
6. At the bottom of the pop up window you have the opportunity of entering the image gallery section rather that the PDF DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 172 Chapter 8 TouchFly section or the 360 Panoramas section if any Basket the way you save needed items TouchFly gives you the opportunity of making a note of the items your customers want to focus on You can create many baskets name them as you need and fill them with the items from the synchronized catalogue you want to recall later on could be the items your customer chose while walking with you in the Showroom or the ones he she wants you to use in the DomuS3D design calculation and rendering In the next image you can see the Basket entry point where you can choose the basket you want to work with it is the one with the yellow star on the right side of the cell Click on a different star in order to enable a different basket ES e w Ar Basket Operations on Basket 1 Upload Download Empty Options Merge Apply to all baskets Baskets Basket 1 Basket 2 Basket 3 Basket 4 Basket 5 Basket 6 Basket 7 Basket 8 Each item can be added to the currently enabled basket or removed by tapping the button that appears on the details tab of the item pop up The working basket or all baskets if Apply to all baskets is selected can be uploaded to the server DomuS3D A
7. DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 122 Chapter 5 Rendering Num Refractions similar as before in this case you define maximum transparent surfaces among which ray light can pass You can increase this value as well as the previous one if you have more transparent surfaces also considering glass geometry Raggio di luce Raggio di luce Vetro 1 Vetro 2 Vetro 1 Vetro 2 If glass is made of a single layer you need to If glass is made of 2 layers you need to use 4 use no more than 2 refractions refractions Num max bounces maximum total bounces made by ray lights considering the previous 2 parameters Indirect illumination Indirect illumination represents light diffused by existing objects in the scene Activate enables disables diffused light in the scene very similar to Final Gather feature in 3ds Max When enabled rendering procedure is made of 2 steps first one application calculates indirect light which will be applied in the second final step When you select low quality image in the rendering mask this option is automatically disabled enabled in medium high quality Point density A multiplier for the density of final gather points Increasing this value increases the density and thus the quantity of final gather points in the image The points will therefore be closer together and more numerous This parameter is useful for solving geometry problems for example near edges or corners Rays per point Sets how
8. Sun light 93 Switch view 80 System Variables 29 templates 45 Text 47 tile 68 Tile new tile 159 Tile all walls with a single tile 42 72 75 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide Tile the floor 42 Tiles 30 68 TouchFly create multiple panoramas 167 use the editor 166 what does it need for 165 Translucency 112 113 Translucency multiplier 114 Turbidity 94 U UNDO 52 Unit measure 26 up down 74 V Vertical 77 Vignetting 84 V Ray 28 93 artificial lights 98 bibliography 144 choose the engine 81 comparison with mental ray 82 displacement map 115 distributed rendering 140 launch process in 43 launch the render process 83 lights 93 materials 103 materials advanced parameters 118 portal light 101 redering using V Ray 83 Sunlight and sky 93 what s new 200 VRayDisplacementMod 117 VRayMtl 103 104 V RayRT 89 VRaySun 95 W walls 72 White parameter 86 width 49 Y youtube 208 211 Copyright 2014 by Maticad s r l Copyright 2014 by Maticad srl All rights reserved No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system without written permission from the author DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 212
9. oeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseseseeeesrrrrrrrrrrrrerererrrresseseererereeereerererererereeeeeeree 57 DC OO eee ARE E E a E A ad ee ahsaa tion 57 Advanced effects in Navigation window cccccccccsscsssccceeceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaas 57 CHAPTER 3 ELEMENTI S ssicscsscssentatsessesncsssndecvatscscadstesducistscsscssuscessshsccsuscsuacsvachiats 59 ADD ORIPOTSTOPROIBOT Suie taa a te dA ee ae area ea iate dl 59 Choosing from components WINKOW cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaaaaeaaaaaaaas 59 Placing doors and WINO WS tessa ics avictice sostenidesashcuide se tanidbdathebideadcnctaadbabsiedntiinsetsatbatnt 59 Doors and windows PIODCTIC Scsccssirn secu derusisua areas uulcceadsh aanuaa le tauaebaadtalWecaiseneaeltes 60 Placing objects UTA OULD vincn tres dnbo scene sii ta cease dali tate cata ueentantne 61 Avoid automati TOTAN ON oiei een aE E EEE nen A eee raat 61 Align the object to angled walls xiccacsatueradialeia stots ndeta dketieve Sad eedd oni hihie lucnictebn 61 Detailed position in the TAVOUE 5 sce cadet dates cedas aaa nada Castes cada eade 61 Placing objects in navigation WINOW Wo ccccccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 62 From external FICAIIX EO DS wuexetice cess sta seset asst slau seaet abst utas sean ccneaanaasaearuebsunnaiss 62 From external file DAE sticeite saat atinlasde ested a tiled estates a tiliadwstcincctdadnbslaastinscuac aiid 63 Drawing with CAD 2D tools oscar cca cara kas ccaash s
10. p hive X Leyowt Allen Concorde Ambion X re ASU sarta hdl MUMA DAAR ROLO Veo AEDA EN w I Man You should now see the tile applied on the first strip of the wall Note that we have rotated the tile by 90 as its image is vertical and we want it laid horizontally and we have applied 3 lines tile in the new strip which is the first one Now you can try to select a listello in the next image you see that we have selected a new size 34x2 5 changed the rotation to 0 as the listello image is horizontal and number of rows 1 Oo M CREMA MARFIL MATI MATIT DARK IMPERAL Meat Danad REA n MATITA AZUL BAMA MATTA AZUL MACAL PANELS LAYINGS TIS Co M MATITA BCO CARRAI MATITA DESERT CREF ee MATITA NERO MARQ MATITA ROSA PORT i g f 3 3 ITA ROSSO VERC MATITA STATUARIO LIGHTS PHOTO2D IMAGES Options ca jt Ge om ES Grout 09 Rotation 0 0 Hrows 1 gt Stg New vrs Destination Currentroom Align Loft DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 72 Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials Roll back the last strip If you made an error in the last procedure and you want to get rid of the last strip do not UNDO Ctrl IZ because just in this case the correct operation is to click the button you see in the left image the one with the red square around it tool tipped with Delete last strip in the Application As you learnt in the previous paragraph in fact you are creating
11. Be Services Open Create mie DXF TouchFly TouchFly Esegui DB Language Home Restore Catalogs room rrom Editor RenderJob Manager Projects Catalogue Miscellaneous t gt E Empty o gt Users l ROB i 168 GC Ss Ei ma Ft a i ce 7e loading X Live Components The Ribbon is a toolbar that s to say a list of buttons at the top of the screen Each button refers to a single command you can run One of the features of the Ribbon is that it is organized in multi level structure command cards and it groups the largest number of correlated commands for each level Each time you need to find a command open the Tab of the Ribbon the command refers to You can launch a command in 2 different ways by clicking the button in the Ribbon with your mouse or by launching the related shortcut A shortcut is a combination of keyboard buttons that allows you to quickly launch the most commons and used commands it is a standard in any Windows based application At E E E A EE the end of this paragraph you can find a table containing the default shortcuts you can use S right after installation Starting from version Pegasus you can customize your own shortcuts so that you can align DomuS3D combinations to those you already use on other systems You can do that ne a selecting the command More commands available in the small arrow related to Eee onan Ribbon on top of page as you can see in this image As you access the Ribbon customizat
12. Error missing dll Try to check your antivirus software We suggest to exclude DomuS3D folder from the ii system Database Issue Solution DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 193 Appendix cannot find my own tile from the Components window 1 cannot find all the tiles from the component window ODBC Error creating new tile Backup Restore database How to save a backup from DomuS3D cannot find my item code from the component window Live Page Try to check format type Components window shows rectangular tiles only You should use RETT format type for both rectangular and square tiles Try searching your tile with the advanced criteria available command File Menu Database PTiles gt Show DomuS3D automatically hide all the tiles out of production You can change this in setting from the Application preferences Options DomuS3D does not allow to create tiles containing item codes that are already present in the library for the same manufacturer Change the item code and try again Please ensure there is enough free space in your disk Start the MAM Maticad Application Manager software from the start menu and click the Backup button Select a folder where you want to save it and confirm to proceed This backup is not incremental hence the restore feature will overwrite the Application data with the one of the saved backup With the new Pegasus
13. Exposure Value 8 3000000174 f number 8 00 shutter speed s 4 92 fim speed ISO 100 00 Vignetting 0 00 Saturation 0 00 White _ 255 255 Quick preview Rendering image done Generate preview ea dark multiplier 1 00 bright multiplier 0 80 amatam gamma 1 00 Some benchmarks now we have generated a Full HD image 1920x1080 pixels with medium quality rendering parameters in 11 min 31 secs Computer was equipped with Intel Core i7 3960X 3 3 GHz 16 GB Ram on board Graphic card is not involved in rendering unless using V Ray RT You can see the rendering result in the next image Note if you want to switch on the neon effect light drag amp drop over it the material called Autoilluminante which means self illuminated By the way you can rename the material name as you want double click over it and change the name Finally you can see an image outside the window It is called background We have set it while in Navigation window by clicking the Background button available in the Navigation section of the Ribbon Download Sample Project Have you done the same If you report some differences between the image you rendered and the one you can see in this page why not comparing projects Download our version with following link or write it on a browser and click Enter Then extract the project file from the ZIP and import it with command File gt mport Export gt Import project
14. This printout cannot be customized apart for the logos If you need to customize printouts you can refer to a different section as we ll see in the next page DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 148 Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share In the estimate window open the ESTIMATE section of the Ribbon and click Paper layout button as you can see in this image Before printing you can now choose the template you want to use as you can see in the next image Print Print Document General options Title Variant Image resolution How much is it layout Monitor 96 DPI Description Layout options Preview Advanced options Project b Room 1 Estimate with preview N 1 Estimate with preview N 2 Estimate with preview N 3 Destination Project attachment Estimate with preview N 4 Q File C Users massimo MATICAD Documents Project layout In the bottom section you can find several templates available in order to print the estimate Choose one of them and you will see a print preview opening inside the Application as you can see in this image Lie Lieut Hew mehan Enemies i HEME Futi bili of arterials heme wu Cota Beet comer e 4G SL a iaiia ada AHE TEE Ss OF Digia eap Pay Poe CRU kibiti FAL aoe Cee 4110 PEH LATI Indeed this is more than a simple preview As you can see it is Micorosft Word inside your Application showing you the resul
15. and width with the latter you will specify the radius In this case too you will physically see the light In the rendered image if Visible is checked DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 100 Chapter 5 Rendering lll UU Recurs E Oca W Placing a neon in the scene means specifying 2 delimitation points as it is a linear light those points define the orientation and the length of the neon in space Neon has to be configured as physical visible light with a cylindrical shape where you can decide intensity and radius of the cylinder In case of IES lights information about the light including the way to generate soft shadows are included in the ies file you can indeed adjust quality as the related parameter still remains enabled It is important to try out the lights and light effects you have seen in this chapter as lights and illumination are of paramount importance while setting up a stunning rendered image for example and as an exercise you can use a very simple project in order to reduce rendering time and one light at a time in order to try out the effect that light gives to the scene Light made by holes and windows Portal light Holes and windows you create in the walls usually produce light themselves this is called Portal Light and allows you to simulate the light coming from outside the room Holes and windows are settled in order to be Portal light as a default this means that if you do not want the
16. if you want to temporarily disable the step snap option while you are dragging the objects you can press the keyboard s button The spacebar button in fact enables disables the step snap even without opening again the Option mask O Axes Used for the layout window only It is a visual tool only Axis are the small segments on the sides of the layout window With these fields you can specify the distance between them a visual reference O Curves splitting string It is the length of the segment you will create while converting an arch spline or circle to a polyline In order to tile those lines in fact the application needs to convert any non linear entity in a polyline We suggest you to use the same size of the tile you will apply on the segments if any O Rotation step While dragging a 3D object inside the layout window you can rotate it clockwise or anticlockwise with and g buttons of the keyboard This field allows you to decide what s the default rotation increment each time you will click them DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 26 Initial operations and configurations settings Layout General Measures Layout Navigation and Rendering Hardware key System Variables Events Colors Walls Background Height Walls width fiend Curr room wall width Width Walls Filler ights Ligh O C ONS Show o U7 Height 220 0 o HHH O V Show Views Locate application on disk Th
17. mm DURAVIT DN647205118 0 0 1 00 mm DURAVIT DN647205118 0 0 1 00 a PANTO PA03B 0 0 1 00 a PANTO PA03B 0 0 1 00 A VELUX VELUX40S 0 0 1 00 A VELUX VELUX40S 0 0 1 00 PP cERAMICAGLOBO DBA80 0 0 1 00 PME cERAMICAGLOBO DBA80 0 0 1 00 id MATICAD MIO756 id MATICAD MIO756 ___ MATICAD mi0442 _ MATICAD mi0442 MATICAD M0256 MATICAD MI0256 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 146 Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share Change item s waste factor If you want to change a single item waste factor select the item double click the left mouse button on it and you ll approach the item panel see next image Item code Internal code 10756 LF tt Labor material RoomName Description Proj Currency Room 1 w GIALLO PERSIANO EURO Supplier No pcs Waste Qty sold MATICAD PZ v 27 00 0 0 30 00 V No Price T Choice Price VAT ATEx Weight 5 1 0 00 0 0 NO w 90 00 Discount Discounted price VAT amount Net amount Gross amount 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 Co ma gt Change the waste factor as you need and that the estimate will update items quantity In this mask you can also change standard details such as description price and even items code just remember that once you update again the estimate you ll loose those changes so make them just at the end of the designing phase and prior printing exporting Red T in this image is related to the Price Type field Export the estimate DomuS3D allows you to export the proj
18. 7 buttons that can even be customized with Predefined view their related keyboard shortcuts The bigger one allows you to get to the default point of view when opening the Navigation window standard shortcut is 1 The remaining six allow you to move at the edge of the room or at the top of it the top is very a useful one as it allows you to have a look at the room from above as you can see in this image standard shortcut is 6 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 56 Chapter 2 Navigation Navigation useful features Save current point of view If you want to save a 3D point of view in order to find it again when re opening the project you can click My Views button in the Navigation group of the Ribbon You get the same result even by clicking the shortcut button F3 You will access the Views management mask where you can save current or even load different point of view available in the saved list F3 shortcut works both in layout and navigation window but just in the latter you can save a point of view Saved views are usually important if you want to create a movie or a walk around in the scene as we will see in the next paragraphs create renderings with the same perspective maybe using different tiles colors objects in order to let your customer focusing on the variations by looking at the scene from the same point of view The trash button in the mask allows you to delete the selected view Also notice that
19. Arabic Means that this language is not contained in the standard setup DVD contact Marketing Department details at the end of the manual if you want to order a DVD or download Installation Procedure for those languages DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 18 Initial operations and configurations settings INITIAL OPERATIONS AND CONFIGURATION SETTINGS DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 19 Initial operations and configurations settings Up to date images and chapters in this manual Please consider that your version of the program may slightly differ from the one used while writing this version of the manual Especially regarding program interface toolbar dialog boxes there might be some light differences in buttons texts and translations etc If available a new version of the manual please download it from the Live page as it will probably contain those differences you re still missing If you re running an older version of DomuS3D please consider that some features you can find on the manual may not be available in your version Starting the program In order to start the program double click the icon available on your desktop DA Live Page When the application opens at first you can see the so called Live page You will soon see that DomuS3D lets you working in separate contests called Windows or Tabs Live is the start up window it may vary depending on the Internet connection availability l s z i
20. Change the grout on the floor by clicking the right mouse button over the floor and selecting command Change grout i If you want to move the tiles starting position move the point of view in order to focus the new starting point Click the right mouse button over the floor and select command Modify tiling position Finally move the green ball over the new starting point and confirm this choice by clicking the left mouse button over it Let s save project by selecting the button on top of the Ribbon Ca or clicking the keyboard buttons CHEI Tile walls a Inthe Navigation window move the point of view in order to see the part of the room with the countertop remember to enter the room if you were out of the room you could tile the exterior walls b Open the TILES section of the Components window and search the tile you want to apply to the wall c Select the walls icon it so that the Application knows that you want to tile walls Check the grout value and colour In H rows field say 4 this is the number of tiles that you want to place in the first section also called strip of the wall In the Destination field select Surface in this way Application will apply tiles just to this wall and not to all the walls of the room In the Align field select Centre Now you are ready to drag the tile and drop it over the wall siding the countertop If you ve correctly followed these steps you should see a first stri
21. Corder wa tn toh 3 cms Ce Ae Wee Ata AE ES ah keen Soe Bt 4 ae ek te ea oP Po il ael P Ti i ph AG ay p a ee ay G ea es ee ee es ee a ttt nn Eea DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 75 Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials Change strip origin and alignment You can modify the alignment of each strip anytime you want Click the right mouse on the strip you want to change and select command Modify strip origin You can change the origin with the mouse by aligning the new origin to existing snaps such as tiles objects corners or typing the exact offset with the numeric fields remember that you can switch between them using keyboard button When typing it is recommended not to move the mouse as moving it will cause the fields values to change Press keyboard button when finished typing Using dynamic patterns You saw in the paragraph related to floor tiling the power of dynamic patterns Consider that you can use dynamic patterns also while designing wall tiling see next image Refer to Cover the floor Using dynamic patterns paragraph earlier in this chapter in order to learn how to tile using dynamic patterns Tile a shower box corner When you are in the Navigation window you can click the right mouse button over an angle in between adjacent walls In the context menu you will find the command Corner Tile shower box corner if you can t see it it means that you did not cl
22. Creme Bathroom PROJECT Bagno Creme a PROJECT fago Creme Full bell of matarialg DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 154 Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share Share It is important to be able to share the project with customers architects colleagues or even just moving it on your iPAD or Android Tablet smartphone in order to check and show it everywhere you are Thanks to the free App called DomuS3D Box you can export the 360 Panorama to your device Connect to the AppStore or GooglePlay download the App and start sharing projects The App runs on iOS systems iPAD iPhone iPod 4 2 or later and Android systems 4 2 or later Share single Panoramas In the Navigation window open the Navigation section of the Ribbon and select the command Save Panorama 360 You will get to the following mask Source Navigation _ Folder Destination C New virtual tour Variant Description Creme Bagno Ambition Folder C Users MATICAD Documents Project 6 3D panorama DomuS3D Box by e mail Web Browser by e mail Cancel Source If you want to share the project with Navigation quality in the Source group select Navigation The Panorama is generated from the current point of view of the Navigation window If you want to share the Rendering quality select Folder and locate the folder where you formerly saved the 360 Panorama in rendering mode refer to rendering Chapter for saving panoramas Dom
23. EAE AE AEA A EEEa 50 MOVIN E CONES ooi ei E I E I ETE E OE E AN R 51 Splitting exwine walls s a Aa aa hae cto detec a aA aae aaa ea aa a aae 51 S bdividine the TOOM sisri n Ene aE EEE EE EEEE E E E aah 51 UNDO E A met A E ne ent E A E A ean teem 52 SHORTCUTS AVAILABLE IN LAYOUT WINDOW sccccccceceeeessssssnceeeeeeeeeecceeesessssaaeeeeeeceeeeeeeesaaaas 52 AVAILABLE SNAPS IN LAYOUT rieo E E EE E E A AE E E 53 CHAPTER 2 NAVIGATION pi scsssssscsciensecsvusasacecuussnccansicagsuesasccebusesecusasecevepniaceceenendes 54 THE NAVIGATION WINDOW fojsiecchc iert A aad teach Sided vase eaatlend Staueldt cactus Geuendseeatensiant 54 FOTU O ileoSvwsts octet lie tae gt cel eaten aati aura Mas sceldeatcuet Naa seal eeucndlean edltaduanhes 54 How 10 OP CHIN GVICUTON sssdiseaak cid osaiseeiuaaliansdusauneseraaleswasvsuigaescead seed E a EES 54 POF CSU i tcc dar lee ba ee anette tn tla tla tea 54 HOWTO MOVE aaah Marais aan aster iauata E evel sense uauaennand eave A E OE nays 55 With your IOUS esse e a lacs uaa e a a e aaa a a aE 55 With yo rkeyb rd eh Sassen E E E E E A E A e E A S 55 With your SpaceNavigator excreta ca tae GUase ana eras eel ea at ia 56 Use standard VIEW points hasten aleu nai selinnesseod sen lnieio nol a E 56 NAVIGATION TISEFUL PRA TURES 0 ste ei cvie tee eea e NE EAE Maken Ste thee lint Sate edn e 57 Save current point Of VIEW oh fice hacicintd Silo asin DAedd eit he ela eld Eaiilia aise Silica hind ental 57 Change Field of Vi W
24. EE E EE A Si 80 Switch view from Floor to Walls in 2D vaciiccecsicsasescccsneentisnasendsssneancdasassndcdedesvieseeetios 80 CHAPTERS RENDERING vronn NEE AADRESS 1 INTRODUCTION aay eee Dea een ne ce en ae eae T eet Oe eee ee ee 81 CHOOSE TINE CMT anita eset ec ee a uence Meter a 8l Comparison between mental ray and V RAY cccccccccccccsccscssecececeeeeesesesseesssssseeeess 82 RENDERING BY USING VERA Y rosaria aE a E N Mice date E A EE E N ae 83 Launch the rendering process oooooooooooonooeeeeeeesesesessssssssesesneseeeeeeeeeennossssssssssssssssssssso 83 VT IT ee NaN E EA S 89 Howto manage Ments seisne e E das bilan E E 93 Sun light sun and sky rt ORs Oi Oe Out at eset asa ai 93 SUN Hohi SECON stella act ttt eA EE RAEE EEE EE EERE EREE AE 93 Artificial H OVALS inpia EEEa EAE antes aai 98 Light made by holes and windows Portal light ccccccccccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeseesesseeeees 101 Materials and the rendering in V Ray occccccccccccccccccccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 103 Materials for objects and furnishing ClOMents cccccccccccccccccccccccccccsscsesseeeeeeseeseees 103 pump Ma ORR ee e a E rar Te Cn ETES EEE 115 Stones the Displacement MOD so e seciisesenuseseaddarlinuedeu nod dualinvesiaWiiesueddel 115 Materials Advanced parametefS oooeneeeneeneeeeeenesssesseesseneroseseeseeeeessssssssssssssssssso 118 Materials in projects ecstatic edhe edad ata Rano ns aa 120 RENDERING BY USING MEN PAD RAY haar AEE O
25. The dividing procedure takes care of existing tiling on the former walls trying to maintain them even in the new structure You can find this command in the Layout window click the right mouse button in the middle of the room and select command Subdivide room Refer to Chapter 1 Layout to learn more DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 197 Appendix Navigation window The engine of the Navigation Window has been strongly empowered with shadows reflections and new effects for the tiles finishes in this way the Navigation window is approaching a better quality that starts becoming similar to the one given by the rendering engine Ambient Occlusion effect is now available in Navigation too so that you can have shadows effects where surfaces get in contact Refer to the Navigation chapter to see this feature in more detail You can now manage the sun light directly in the Navigation window so that you can see in real time the effect of the modified properties If you click the right mouse button on the wall you have now several commands in order to Wall dynamically manage the tiles and strips on the wall create a new strip under the one you have Change tile gt selected change the strip height delete selected strip or move up down the strip you are ESE AN focusing on This set of commands available with the mouse dramatically speeds up your Tile material Data productivity when planning tiles on the project walls Copy amp Paste
26. Window d Supplier price list 1 Live Models lj Attachments LE v 2Layout Maximus Tiles i Properties Ctrl D 3 Virtual navigation Formats CLG gt Panels Fol Share Ctrl H Carpets J Furnishing elements gt New gt New igg i Materials gt TA Show fg Select items group Tile Materials gt TS Mod EEE fad Import Export gt r ify ie a ew a a e a SYS A TR Delete De beta aaa External documents gt Groups ve Copy De ava 3k ody we a a gang tabormatenals S Export Eoo d Send DS 1S Import ESEEIIEIIEI II ag g Manufacturers _ rs i Menu ne Ee Meee EEJ Catalogue gt e U4 om ge oe ee ImportDXFelements po 04 te Opti IdentiTile b p ramea s Options ZERIT T acs pon enue You will be asked to select the items you want to group using the left mouse button Confirm and stop selection by using the right mouse button and finally provide item information Usually external files are simple 3D files and do not have any material associated to their layers Later on in this chapter you will see how to assign new materials to the available sections of any object From external file DAE COLLADA files are 3D objects usually created or converted with Google SketchUp they are available in the Internet and can be downloaded for personal use following the license terms available in the web site In order to find them you can open a search engine and type Google Wharehouse At the time of writing
27. Ze BamuS30 Pegasus Lisel X Hart ATARA G2 ma Emoty Ei Users ermi Ti babe E 5 ea C ry A rapt ae er caf T ii n dead os Lal H B Rectangle Ti raice a ae Open Create m Tech hy TechFh Eregu DE Language Heme Restee Catalogs Show Dde by side room bii Fren OXF Editer Renderjob Maneger Padina Lae x J Components d FRARETI p alalogues Online traning O6 G oe ir z A RESTRICTED AREA Projects Fumishing elements news Catalogues i H A i i Atlas Gondonda Anihition View all n Manufacturer i 0 Open project ees pr E Catalogues E wi m i z l Code 5 W ae LETTET Kja ERRA 5 Roi Eogh d J Eil Piai zi anes Lagni s r a il ki seanch s a ri E i maf t e Fi s e r a i I a i n E s b t T i d t Io f z m a ml or g Online training Registration Reference manual Patt E poo Ci Not regi E Lt Chok hee fo Cece EET member a A F Ed F ray Reherence i n New password A manual 3 i l ty i damy i 5 f i E a I imi 3 7 4 Hi m Online Maning E i m ho Ronm izor ma T E r z I i j fe De fe e iT 1 When connected to the Internet you can access online training where you can play movies related to the most important features of the application Along with this manual you will find some references to those movies so that you can play the movie related to the feature you are evaluating furnishing elements news on
28. a dynamic panel on that wall by using this button you can remove the last strip you placed on that panel wall Rotation 0 H rere Sig Hew Change strips height manually If you need to change the strip height you can click the button you see in the left image the one with the red square around it tool tipped with View strips in the Application You will open a mask a ea a where to control the dynamic panel For example you can change the height of any strip currently Lice 5 5e te available in the panel you can delete a strip or you can even leave it empty sometimes this is useful when you need to tile just a section of the wall Have a look at the Panel strips mask and play around with it A second and quicker way to change strip height is to use the context menu in Navigation window click the right mouse button on the strip you want to modify and select command Strip height gt Manual Pick a graphic reference in case you have one for the new height or type the new value In the same menu you find the command that allows you to delete a strip create an empty new one or even change strip grout oes Tl e mA hen Le fe Change strios height with tiles number You can change the height of an available strip of a wall by specifying the number of tiles you want to find in that strip In Navigation window click the right mouse button on the strip you want to modify and select command Strip height DTi
29. a spot lamp a new set of light sources and parameters designed specifically to provide truly realistic lighting effects was introduced to the exclusive use of an advanced rendering engine Physic lights and photometric lights are two different kinds of lights customized for an advanced rendering engine Among the artificial lights we recommend you to use photometric lights for lamps and spot lamps actually this is the program standard setting when a new light is created inserted as to neon light you should select the physic light type In addition to the traditional method to insert a new light in the project among the various pieces of furniture a new Furniture Lamps with Light type has been prepared It is available online to those possessing active download fees it is a set of lamps and a chandeliers incorporating the light source bulb or neon As to these elements it is enough to focus on their environment position just like all the other pieces of furniture A properly configured light source has already been installed there Position in plan E Cc Light X 886 Y 2187 Focus x 150 0 Y 150 0 Elevation Light Focus Light features 200 0 0 0 Attenuation distance Light beam amplitude Shadows Light Type Base 1 00 Multipber Physical 100000 Photons 0 1 000 000 Photometric spot penumbra Photometric Lights Intensity Preset Lumen Im felet a preset 7 Lo
30. amp Drop This is a way of working that allows you to pick objects from the Components windows and place them in the project The Drag step consists in clicking the left mouse button over the object keep that button pressed DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 12 and move the cursor over the project The Drop step consists in releasing the object on the project window sometimes this means clicking again the left mouse button in order to decide the object position The sample project The sample project available in Part 4 will step by step guide you while creating your first DomuS3D project It is important that right after installation and catalogues download you spend some time practicing with this project together with the QuickStepGuide as it shows the most important and useful features you will refer to in your daily use DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 13 Introduction Part 1 Introduction What s new in DomuS3D Pegasus If you are a former DomuS3D Antares user you may like to find Pegasus news just in one place Here you can find a quick list of what s new in Pegasus compared with Antares version together with the chapter where to find information Refer to the Appendix in order to find a detailed and documented list of the news available in Pegasus Pegasus SA version can now rely on SQL Runtime Local DB Chapt 7 New Interface Ribbon and Shortcuts now available What s new in Components Window Single item download
31. are available in the Layout window when drawing entities or moving objects Snaps to the endpoints of lines Vertex arches polylines Perpendicular Intersection You can enable disable snaps even while drawing entities clicking the s keyboard button or the button o in the status Snaps on any closest point you can find on lines arches circles polylines Snaps to medium point of referenced entity Snaps to perpendicular point given by drawing line and target line Snaps to the center of a circle or radius Snaps to the tangent point referenced by drawing line and a given circle or arch Snaps to the crossing point given by entities intersection DOBRO bar If you click the right mouse button on the snaps button and select command Settings you open the snaps configuration see image below where to set the snaps you want to be available W Vertex E Close Point V Mid Point V Perpendicular E Centre W Tangent E Intersection DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 53 Chapter 2 Navigation Chapter 2 Navigation The Navigation window Introduction The Navigation window is the place where you can see the project in 3D moving all around in order to change the needed point of view Also Navigation window allows you to interact with the project modifying some parts of it for example you can place new objects and furnishing or move delete the existing ones Or even tile
32. available in the DATABASE section of the Ribbon in the pricelist group Here s the list of the fields the text file has to contain be careful of the order and their explanation as the fields have been reported with the internal name of the database all fields are separated by a comma and text qualifier is woe woe WoW mu codice cod_articolo var_colore codice_produttore tipo_listino categoria cod_valuta descrizione fornitore collezione desc_serie in_produzione tipo_formato formato peso_unitario nrpz_confezione unita_misura data_genlist data_declistO cod _listinoO esente_iva0 aliquota_ivaO prezzo_base0O prezzo_base01 prezzo_base02 codice Internal Showroom Item code alphanumeric maximum 24 characters cod_articolo Item code original by manufacturer alohanumerical maximum 24 characters var_colore Color variant alohanumeric maximum 12 characters Set to 0 if not used codice_produttore Manufacturer s code Has to be the same as the Manufacturers table tipo_listino Price list type alohanumeric maximum 4 characters Set to STD if not used categoria Set to PIAS for tiles or ARRE for furnishing elements cod_valuta Currency code alphanumeric maximum 4 characters Set to Euro if not used descrizione Item s description alphanumeric maximum 80 characters fornitore Manufacturer s description alohanum
33. be calculated with 2 different algorithms Automatic waste and No waste As you can see in the next image you can quickly switch between the two directly from within the Estimate window Live X Layout How much is it X FS T0EE C Grouped by Room Automatic waste _ PreviefNowaste Colection Forma Automatic waste this is the standard algorithm used by the Application The Application knows that every time you cut a tile you have to consider a waste factor For this reason if you are using more than 50 of a tile the Application adds the complete tile to the Estimate as the rest is considered waste this is common for tiles No waste calculation refers to theoretical area covered by the tile without any waste The area of the surface floor wall is mathematically divided by the area of the tile This is common for hardwood resins but also in order to know the exact square meters you need for each item In the next images you can see the difference between Automatic No waste Look at the Waste and Sold quantity fields totals change depending on the choice you made Live X Layout How much is it X Estimate x Live X Layout How much is it X Estimate x Update Automatic waste Y C Grouped by Room Update No waste C Grouped by Room Preview Manufacturer ltem Waste Sold qty Preview Manufacturer ltem Waste Sold qty gt A DURAVIT 700137 0 0 1 00 gt DURAVIT 700137 0 0 1 00
34. case right from the first point Finally we typed 50 centimeters in order to tell the Application the extensions entity and pressed keyboard button We did not have enough space on the countertop in fact to use the left mouse button again and terminate extension so the extension field has been useful in order to specify the correct extension we need ee ARNIS In the next images you can see the washbasin before and after the extension procedure e25 EES MMMM DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 65 Chapter 3 Elements Mirror If you have asymmetric objects and in the library there s just the left or right version you can obtain the specular copy by yourself Once the object has been placed in the Layout click the right mouse button on one of the object lines select the command Mirror The Application needs you to specify the line that will define the mirror in the following image it is the vertical red line in the middle This line tells the Application how to mirror the objects Provide 2 points and you will obtain a new object specular to the first one by that mirror line you can click the first one where you want then it might be important that for the second one you remain horizontal or vertical For this purpose remember that you can enable Orthogonal mood by pressing o keyboard button Mirror line PAIERO ennnnnnnns peerereneeee AARAA ATANAN ARAARA AARAA MMM R Mirrored object Original object
35. case of multi rooms projects it is now possible to Changi ble extend the floor pattern from one room to the other Wa Restore neutral tile thanks to the command Extend floor tiling available in AY PANSO rae Tomais Tile material the Navigation window Data New strip Strip height Delete strip Move strip up Move strip down Modify strip origin Change Grout Modify tiling Copy tiling Paste tiling Delete tiling Modify tiling position Create off shaded effect Delete image Tiles layer Options DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 202 Appendix Technical blueprints You can decide if the technical blueprint for the installer will provide also details regarding the height of the strips you created in each wall You can activate this option in the Application Preferences Options mask 350 0 General siamres Layout Naagaton and Rendering Hardware key System Variaties Events MI Show thes n wreframe mode Sener for ha kutii 4 Dalay elements in Modify Tiing J automan dimensions Advanced items selection ties paneis fun chements Wi Ting origin dimension Ji The Numbers in Techical Printouts Loadisave project on Sie 7 Perireter Ging continuous Dmax is Tooltips Wordt Exitor Restore T Show internal Macsoft word 2007 or newer Windows on horizontal ceiling You can now place Velux windows on horizontal ceilings while Velux on sloping roofs was already available as a command
36. com In this way end users creating their own projects online can share them with the Point of Sale in order to let the designer preparing more solutions and better renderings when meeting the customer DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 204 Appendix Modular furnishing module DomuS3D Pegasus can integrate third party software in order to complete the Application potential One of these integrations can be used in case you need to design more complex parametric furnishing elements such as kitchens offices etc as the Application contains static objects only In these images you can see ArredoCAD integration ArredoCAD is a software specialized in modular furnishing elements and contains all features in order to create your own cabinet Its contains already a generic library with thousands of cabinets from kitchens bathrooms offices bedrooms living rooms wardrobes etc Contact Maticad if you want to receive further information on this optional module A Mikea D pora Panie reed Me Sy bow a 2 fea ie 2 mh IF Wa 2 baa Ee i Gy Cet miraia Codon i Dawes Emos Diit Tesiri aija i jirak SE HALS dw Higa G apia D mee es MRED Rane Temna ahi amp gara i eg a Hr oJ Pasarela DE Baa pi Ba ra t foh D bage a iian pe Bate amma biae for arta A Bd 5 hi ia E Ban Temra bike on le it ae W A BS k mE Dawe Tena A a paT E LEI Mr H BE D haana gar ah G ber Area con goei Mg fae Teer Ere
37. command in the list Properties ocnae nena SUGGESTION When you open a context menu always have a look Serre Niche at the title The title tells you about the item the menu is referring 0 0 88 0 ii to If you re not finding the desired command probably you have E te mme Oo cae right clicked the wrong entity That might be possible when you E pr have overlaid objects Internal Centred External Threshold Here we are in the Door properties mask you can see it in the image Activate v Activate on the left Width E a par With the red squares you can see the most used controls when A L_ F e dealing with a door opening side and door position Prominence Prominence Width Width c D 120 JENN 100 ji The opening side controlled by the Right opening check is given by ove properties a TA the handle position By default the handle is on the left and if you Emit diffuse lighting i i i rarm enable this control you ll put it on the right The Position group allows you to decide the position of the door in the wall width area Especially used with multi rooms projects Internal means that the door belongs to the current room while External means that it belongs to the adjacent room in this case the floor available in the sill will be the same as the one of the room Remember to disable the Show door opening check in case you re dealing with sliding doors as the Application does not automatically r
38. different than 45 and also in order to quickly change its elevation from the floor Avoid automatic rotation Sometimes you do not want the object to automatically rotate on the wall you are aligning it to this is the case of shower trays as you want to decide where to place the drain in this case you can use the SPACEBAR keyboard button in order to disable enable the automatic rotation of the object Align the object to angled walls Sometimes you do not know the correct rotation of the object and you need to use the same orientation of existing objects walls while dragging the object in the layout you can use the a keyboard button in order to align the object to existing lines once you have clicked A button the object freezes and the mouse cursor changes as the Application asks you to select the line you want to align the object to It can be a wall or one of the lines of existing objects Once you have selected the align reference entity you can keep on dragging the object in order to release it with the correct orientation Detailed position in the layout We mention finally a method that allows you to place the object in detailed positions when you need to refer to existing objects when you drag the object in the layout if you click the right mouse button you have the Pre opportunity of selecting detailed position algorithms Point delta 1 Point for example allows you to specify an existing point such as wal
39. fully white means fully reflective Darker areas are meant to be opaque Managing materials while inside a project It is possible to manage the materials to use inside the project by executing the command Materials available in the Layout window inside the ribbon group Virtual 3D gt Materials ateri material Ma DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 131 Chapter 5 Rendering Name New Material Destination Element Type Typology Preset l Blu lucido Main Parameters Diffuse Level 100 Diffuse Color E o o 255 Roughness 0 Reflection Reflection Level 75 Reflection Color __ 255 255 255 Reflection Glossir 87 Glossiness Qualit 6 Fast interpolate 7 Fast no rays Metal Material Refraction Maps Diffuse Map Texture Activate File Scale Reflection Map O D Refraction man ok Cancel Casa Material list in project New Modify Acciaio Alluminio Sanitario Specchio CILIEGIO_O Marmo ASCIUGAMANO Whenever you place a furnishing element in the project in fact the application automatically loads the materials needed by the object in the project structure You can create a new material even from this mask New button but it would be available only within the current project or you can create a new one in the application database Database gt Materials gt New and load it inside the project through Load bu
40. in case you do not have plane sections on the objects Maps Diffuse map texture Activate if enabled File field texture will be used instead of object diffuse color File contains full path of the texture map file allows you to browse your disk in order to find Maps Diffuse Map Texture Activate Reflection Map Scale this value is a reference of the size of the it ll be replicated over the object surface enlarged hence step will be bigger If the scale distortion of the image if it is too low you ll texture like a mosaic Which is the right scale quality if it is big and good quality you can graphic quality and effect Default value is 250 Reflection map Activate Refraction map Activate File Scale Bump Map Activate 250 00 to be used for the object This button out the needed file foresaid texture hence the step with which Increasing scale texture image will be is too high you will face the risk of seeing a face the risk of a tough repetition on the then Well it depends on the image size and even use a high scale obtaining a good Activate if enabled File field texture will be used instead of object Reflection level File contains full path of the texture map file to be used for the object This button allows you to browse your disk in order to find out the needed file That file has to contain a grey scale image You can use reflection map when object face
41. laid some tiles on the floor e g a Chequered like the one you can see in the image on the far left In case you need Raeciare mhdr fle to change just one of the tiles and you do not want to apply again Highlight replaceable feemats Tile reatenal the pattern you can get to the Navigation window click the right foe mouse button over the tile you want to change and select atek command Change tile gt Single erradi Mowe itri deren Molly sbi erage Change Grout Modity bling Copy bling Paria ting Die ting Create off thached effect Extend Heer tiling Delete image Tiles layer Select the new tile you want to replace this one with finally tell the Application if you want to make the change on the floor only Total wall tiles or in the project Total room tiles re Change some tiles only If you want to change some tiles only from the Navigation window click the right mouse button over one of the tiles you want to change and select command Change tile gt Multiple selection Proceed selecting one by one the tiles you want to change left image with the left mouse button click the right mouse button when you want to stop selection Choose the new tile to replace the old one with and finally leave the check on Single tile when you ll approach the Replacement type mask In fact you want the Application to replace just the tiles you have manually selected one by one In the left image you can see the r
42. light to be generated you need to disable this behaviour By double clicking the left mouse button on the hole window or by clicking the right mouse button on it and selecting the command Properties open the Properties window for that light DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 101 Chapter 5 Rendering Niche _ Activate Depth 10 0 Position Internal Centred External Threshold Frame Activate Activate Mounting Width Prominence Width A B E Prominence Prominence Width E D G Other properties see Right opening Show door opening oe anc Emit diffuse lighting The rendering parameters for the light coming from a hole aperture are not available in the hole niche s properties mask you can customize them in the Portal lights section of the general rendering parameters window seen before where you can enable Portal lights by checking the On control Before closing this mask indeed it s important to check the Emit diffuse lighting control so that the Portal light will be available from this hole What follows is the description of the variables available in the Portal lights section of the Rendering parameters pane Intensity allows you to set the intensity of the light Subdivs allows you to set the quality of the light low values such as 4 or 8 produce some grain on surfaces but rendering will be quicker Higher values such as 16 24 or 32 solve this unpleasant effect but you ll need to wait a bit longer Intensity
43. many rays are used to compute indirect illumination in a final gather Increasing this value makes global illumination less noisy but also increases rendering time Interpolated points by this parameter the rendering algorithm generation takes into account areas that the discretization points of the light map do not manage In order to do this an interpolation i e averaging within the range of a discrete set of known data points is performed When it happens that not justified halos may be seen in the image you can correct and improve these abnormalities by increasing the parameter value It is a good method to intervene on this parameter in order to try to improve some image details without having to do that in processing time Num bounces Sets the number of times rendering engine calculates diffuse light bounces for each diffuse ray Like Maximum Reflections and Maximum Refractions this value is subject to the restriction of Max Depth If you set Diffuse Bounces higher than Max Depth the latter setting is automatically raised to the Diffuse Bounces value Photons is the same as using Global Illumination in 3ds Max If you choose this option you decide to use an additional indirect illumination method Note when photons check is enabled Num bounces will be ignored Photon density Sets how many photons are used to compute the intensity of the global illumination Increasing this value makes global illumination less noisy but also m
44. modify the line later on select it with the left mouse button click over the node the blue ball and drag it somewhere else If you pick the line in the middle you can move it along the desktop Rectangle same as for the line you can draw a rectangle using the left mouse button or typing the first point coordinates and its horizontal and vertical extension press in order to confirm the typed values Look at the negative values in the fields once you have placed the first point of the rectangle try moving the mouse all around you will see the negative values changing depending on the sector you are moving the mouse over That s a very useful way to understand which direction the negative values will draw in You can modify the rectangle and every other CAD 2D entity pretty the same way you did with the line just before that s to say by picking the lines in order to move it or the nodes to change it Circle there are several ways to draw a circle The most common one is to specify a center and a radius You can set the circle center by using the left mouse button or typing the center coordinates then type the value of the radius or set it using the mouse again also using the available snaps in the layout desktop Try out yourself the other command for drawing a circle as they are pretty self explicable Arch Point point radius specify the points you want the arch to start and end with finally the radius of the arch As always yo
45. mouse button over the tile image drag amp drop it over the wall doesn t matter which wall as you are covering Current room that s to say all walls DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 42 Quick Step Guide gt hive Lam Ale Concorde Andien X Components MUSMAANDORD F648 BU VERONA You should now see the tile applied on the first strip of the wall Note that we have rotated the tile by 90 as its image is vertical and we want it laid horizontally and we have applied 3 lines tile in the new strip which is the first one Now you can try to select a listello in the next image you see that we have selected a new size 34x2 5 changed the rotation to 0 as the listello image is horizontal and number of rows 1 vel X Layout Atiss Concorde Ambition t i Components nn SEV FFANS Semen None gt u ALL THECOLORS pa lt Mancao ROOMS PROJECTS nooo M lt MARMI CREMA MARFIL MATI MATIT DARK IMPERA Da MATITA AZUL BALA MATTA AZUL MACAL MATITA BOO CARRAI MATITA DESERT CREF ree MATITA NERO MARQ MATITA ROSA PORT ITA ROSSOVERC MATITA STATUARIO PHOTO2D MATERIALS FURNISHING ELEMENTS PANELS LAYINGS miis IMAGES LIGHTS Options ca jai Ge E MEE Grout 00 E Rotation 00 Hrows 1 Stp New HEr K Destination Cument room Align Leo Launch the rendering process From Chapter 5 If you want to start the rendering process open the navigation window move the point
46. need if the shape is the one that you need it is far better to use it and change the walls dimensions in the layout window rather than designing it from scratch As you see in this image the components window has a section called rooms this section contains room templates that you can use in order to easily create new projects or new rooms with that shape If you do not have any opened project and you double click on the template you need the Application will let you creating a new project based on that template You just need to assign the customer name info in order to better search and find that project later on and you ll be in ready to start tiling or placing objects If you already have an opened project and you double click a template you will be able to add a second room in the current project that now becomes a multi room project we ll concentrate on multi rooms projects later on in this Manual PANELS LAYINGS TILES 5 S x MM n 5 pai 5 gt gt LIGHTS PHOTO2D MATERIALS FURNISHING ELEMENTS n e Rectangular Room Another quick way in order to create a project is to use the Rectangle template in the Ribbon as you can see in this image it is in the HOME section Projects group but it is not available if you have already an opened project You can launch the same feature by selecting the command File gt New Rectangle This command leads you to the standard project window where you can fill in the
47. of a tiled area from a surface to a different one Copied tiling is kept in memory even if you close the project This allows you to open create a new project and apply there the tiling you had in the previous one Modify strip origin Change Grout Modify tiling Delete tiling Modify tiling position Create off shaded effect Delete image Tiles layer Vertical tiling Activate laying Options Change strips height manually If you need to change the strip height you can click the button you see in the left image the one fa i B afa fe with the red square around it tool tipped with View strips in the Application You will open a mask sss s E reste 900 where to control the dynamic panel For example you can change the height of any strip currently e 5e s available in the panel you can delete a strip or you can even leave it empty sometimes this is useful when you need to tile just a section of the wall Have a look at the Panel strips mask and play around with it A second and quicker way to change strip height is to use the context menu in Navigation window click the right mouse button on the strip you want to modify and select command Strip height Manual Pick a graphic reference in case you have one for the new height or type the new value In the same menu you find the command that allows you to delete a strip create an empty new one or even change strip grout DomuS3D Pegasus U
48. only configured user is also administrator of the computer 2 Insert the installation DVD in the driver and wait for the start up window to appear It will show something similar to next image Wy T Raita 140 514 Date DEDAJ preinstalled aa Ra lan fa Sees eee Domus Antares Install TouchF ly Backup i Restore Install Render Manager i Browse DWD i mp A Domusag install Render Slave Safelet Click the round button called Install DomuS3D if You never installed DomuS3D and want to install a new version on the computer You have a previous version of the software and you want to upgrade to Pegasus version The next screen will be similar to the following one y O O pers o ee EXIT The installation procedure should automatically check the language of the operating system but you can change the installation language among the ones available for your operating system and DVD If needed language is not available in the list contact the Manufacturer in order to investigate language availability for this version Finally always remember that even if you selected the wrong language for installation you will be able to change application language even later on while using it DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 16 Introduction 3 The installation procedure takes place in 2 different sections r DomuS3D Antares InstallShield Wizard T DomuS3D Antares requires the followi
49. orange which is typical of metropolitan environments so rich of dust and pollution Turbidity can vary in between 2 0 and 20 0 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 94 Chapter 5 Rendering F _ Turbidity Turbidity _ Turbidity 18 00 Ozone this parameter affects the colour of the light made by the VRaySun If value is nearly 0 sun light is warmer and colour gets more yellow while if you move around 1 light is colder and colour gets more blue sky blue This parameter does not affect the scene ina very evident way 3 2 _ G Sore 5 A ai b ii ae R Sart at a Ze Spies 2 Ozone I Ozone 1 00 a gt Bh e M AE Ge A tes i CR BAe A TE D EE r SF 3 a lt ha PS EPa aa F Pret Sy Pee PG a St ee a es Dz s3 i As anes it Sm ee ES ON a a a 90 Elevation 0 90 this value is given in degrees and tells you about the vertical height of the sun In this image you can see the sun when at 45 the project is always placed in the centre of the simulation If you move the sun down to 0 you have a less intense illumination which is typical of dawn and sunset 90 will give you strong light coming from the top ceiling of the room which is typical of noon 45 sun SA 0 project DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 95 Chapter 5 Rendering Bey gt You can move the sun in the simulation pane by clicking over it the yellow circle
50. project generic information therefore you have the opportunity of specifying the size of the rectangle as well as the height of the walls In case you type in the wrong dimension don t worry as you will always be able to change the project size later on while planning refer to modification section later on in this chapter Free hand drawing The free hand drawing usually is the most used feature to draw a customized project as it allows you to draw any shape you need You can start this command in several ways by clicking the Create Room button in the Ribbon in the HOME section Projects group disabled if a project is already opened by clicking the shortcut Ctrl N that can be used also if a project is already opened by selecting the command File gt New gt Manual Drawing DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 45 Chapter 1 Layout Once specified the project generic information the desktop will let you placing the corners of the room you can click the Ges left mouse button in any position in order to start with the origin of the room Then move the mouse to the next corner s location and click again in order to create the wall Do it again and again till the first corner you created The Application will recognize that the room is complete and will close it for you ash If you made any mistake with any of the corners you created you can roll back by clicking the right mouse button and selecting the command Un
51. rendering Consider that as per today the RT process is still under development and refinement this means that we cannot guarantee that the RT image quality will be the same as the standard engine But it s worth to try RT out in order to understand if the quality is good enough for you if it is for sure you ll wait less than with the standard engine RT is not available in Render Manager Mi a rsion IE We Pegasus version Full Partial Dynamic In order to use V Ray RT open the navigation window move the point of view to the needed position then wee kendeng get to the Navigation section of the Ribbon and click the Dynamic image button You will get to the RT mask where to adjust parameters and launch the process First of all let s have a look at the Engine type we discourage you to use CPU with RT CPU is better used in the standard rendering process The best choice is CUDA if you have a NVIDIA graphic card or Open for any other graphic card Always remember to keep the graphic drivers up to date when you use GPU rendering Parameters Engine type Trace depth GI depth Rays per pixel Image size 640x480 Pixel Resolution 640 x 480 C Choose the image resolution and click OK the Application will open the RT window and you will see the rendering process inside What s nice in this way of working is that the rendering engine does not stop your design process you can keep on working within the p
52. representation Measures General Measures Layout Navigation and Rendering Hardware key System Variables Events Unit measure Decimals Grid Step v Activate V Activate Lenaths 0 3 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 Weights 0 3 Axis Angles 0 3 V Activate Areas 0 3 100 0 100 0 a m a X a X a X a X Prices 0 2 curves splitting string Rotation step Locate application on disk O Unit measure Here you can change the unit measure you want to work with The default is cm centimeters but you can work also in millimeters meters inches and feet BE CAREFUL in Client Server installations all the Client users have to work with the same language and the same unit measure as this choice affects the database setup which in case of a Client Server is unique and the same for all the users OO Grid Used for the layout window only If enabled the application draws small dots on the desktop Those dots create a grid as a visual reference for the designer Such Grid is just a visual tool and does not affect any snap or interaction with the mouse This field allows you to setup the grid size horizontal and vertical O Step Used for the layout window only Enabling this option you will snap the objects you drag in the desktop to the steps you are setting up It is useful to use for the step the same values used for the grid so that you can see where the snaps are
53. scene In order to connect it click and open the first panorama the one you want to start from then click the left mouse button on the preview image of the second one the disconnected one and drop it in the central scene release the mouse pointer just in the position where you want to place the doorway to the second scene Remember to do the vice versa too in order to be able to come back to the first scene The result will be similar to this one D Edit 3D Panoram Here you can see that this icon refers to hotspot that opens the item details image while this icon refers to the entry point that allows you to enter the second scene you have loaded Now you have a multi room 2 scenes panorama DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 168 Chapter 8 TouchFly Share the extended catalogues Create a playlist You can share every part of the catalogue you want it can be the full catalogue rather than just a part of it e g some collections the ones you want to show to a specific customer in his premises The Playlist tool allows you to create multiple sets of data you can refer to while synchronizing your devices nevertheless it is an iPad or a PC visualizer You can create as B Users many Playlists as you want need and decide which one to synchronize time by time Reed E Ren In order to create or modify your Playlist select command Services in the Catalogue group Home section Editor Catalogue of the Ribbon You wil
54. should be a bit slower depending on the project complexity and computer power By enabling the Sun light control you are now able to open the natural light mask directly in Navigation clicking the 20 Natural Natural light button in the Navigation group of the Ribbon Change the Sun position and intensity and check the result ight in real time inside the navigation window Natural light Activate if Multiplier 0 1 10 1 00 Scale 0 1 10 1 00 Invisible E Soft shadow quali amp Turbidity 3 00 0 35 Elevation 0 90 Azimuth 180 180 rn amp CD ee GS As you can see in the image Ambient Occlusion effect together with some tiles finishes is now available in Navigation too so that you can have shadows effects where surfaces get in contact DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 58 Chapter 3 Elements Chapter 3 Elements Add objects to project Choosing from components window As you need to browse the internal library in order to find the needed objects it is important to learn the way of using the components window sa None 7 SEARC The quickest way to find an item is to use the SEARCH field by typing the MACRO FORWARD gt item code or the description the collection name etc For example if you type in a Manufacturer name you will filter the library just with the items coming from that Company The most accurate is the text you re typing in the better will be the search 829 2 ST
55. single design tool DomuS3D Even if running within the same application they are still 2 different software for this reason for any technical support related to the modular furnishing system you need to refer to that software manufacturer instead of Maticad Dow 30 Pegasus Gobel oompie S MIVOGQsah Fi 2 o ail B lt h F i DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 174 Chapter 9 Modular Furnishing Module Install and register the additional module Download the setup DVD In order to obtain the ArredoCAD integrated module connect to the following link www dinamicasoft com DomuS3D When asked profile yourself with following credentials Username DomuS3D Password ArredoCAD You will have access to the download area HORAMK A upwa ARREDOCAD DOMUS 3D Dati richiesti per il download Data required to download WOME SOCIETA Coen HAME Miaticad IMDIAITZO ERTL FRAIL ADORE SS Suppomtadomussd com gt DVD_ARREDOCAD PEGASUS parti exe 10 February 2014 18 00 30 1464 84 Mb DVD_ARREDOCAD PEGASUS part2 rar 10 February 2014 18 06 32 1271 67 Mb Specify your Company name and your e mail address this will help Dinamica in order to provide you a 30 days TRIAL access code Then download the following files and save them in the same folder DVD_ARREDOCAD_PEGASUS part1 exe DVD_ARREDOCAD_PEGASUS part2 rar Once completed both downloads click the first one DVD ARREDOCAD PEGASUS p
56. size of the left one you can check Same as left control Differently set the correct panel size DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 186 Let s save project by selecting the button on top of the Ribbon ia or clicking the keyboard buttons J Changing walls material Left side Use tiles Use a panel seet 0 1 Grout 0 0 Rot COLOURLINE BLUE Width 221 0 Height 1 21 N Columns 10 0 N Rows 0 0 Elevation Right side _ Same as left Use tiles Use a panel Select E 0 1 Grout 0 0 Rot COLOURLINE BLUE 100 Width 221 Height 1 51 N Columns 10 0 N Rows 0 0 Elevation V Show corner box when dosing this mask The Sample Project 8 Walls have a specific material in the section that is not tiled the upper one Let s proceed assigning it a DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide Go to the Navigation window Open MATERIALS section of the Components window and select Masonry level Cemento ntonaco cappuccino or any other of your choice Drag and drop it on the wall you are currently looking at repeat this operation for all the highlighted walls that you can see in the next image 187 The Sample Project 2 0 348 0 18 0 Note if Intonaco cappuccino is not available in the Application library you can download it in the Catalogues section of the Live page Ref to Catalogues DMATERIALS gt ADVANCED RENDERING DMATICAD add ma
57. that manufacturer create a reference for it be careful at the manufacturer code the Application will not let you use an existing manufacturer code while creating a new one Next step is to select the image the item refers to click the B button in order to locate the image file on disk If you are modifying an existing tile you can click the C marked button in the image in order to open the tile s image folder Finally we need to specify the item format Click the Simple button and you will access the following mask r MT O A Tite format ee GA Tite deere a oad Fn a z a S Fi 4 e 7 v aaa 7 y j o r L ENS a Jag yo l Men Dee an i es ey Aetlareyhs Henry oor ra r arn m Loe i Lo ae 5 A OE Im Si aus 1 i l es ie A ont ja be a gt gt m Ga b rh EJIPT EECA Fa Fa So IDES Po sy i i an Ch Lamar Here you can choose in the left section of the mask the format shape note that depending on the format you choose this mask will reveal 2 or 3 fields where to place the format dimensions in this image you can see b and h as the rectangular format is based on 2 dimensions Once you have selected the format shape specify the tile s format filling in the b h fields or select values that are already existing in the list the one on the left side of the mask and click the arrow to copy and paste it The left column of
58. the Introduction chapter Such a ceiling is horizontal If you need to create sloping roofs you can move the cursor on the internal side of the wall you want the sloping roof to start from then right click the cursor over it and select command Sloping roofs DAdd You will open the Sloping Roof properties where you can set the roof dimensions If you made any mistake you can change that roof again by clicking the right mouse button on the sloping roof line and select command Sloping roofs gt Properties or double click it with the left mouse button Sloping roofs Delete allows you to remove the sloping roof and get back to the horizontal standard ceiling If you search for Velux windows in the Components panel you can see that those windows can be applied to sloping roofs only starting from Pegasus indeed you can place them on horizontal ceilings too That is a very useful feature also in order to allow natural light entering the scene from the top As you will see in the chapter related to Rendering techniques sun and natural light are very important for a realistic illumination of the scene Note that if you add a sloping roof the consecutives walls the Application will automatically merge them around the corner DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 50 Chapter 1 Layout Moving corners Moving corners is important when you want to change the room dimensions shape Move the cursor on the corner you want to move then right
59. the existing entities in the layout desktop and select command Virtual navigation as you can see in this image If the Navigation window is already opened by selecting one of the aforementioned commands will not open a second navigation but will make the existing one visible top of windows Please note that you do not have to close the Navigation window once you go back to the layout you can leave it opened and keep on working in the layout or the tiling window While hidden in fact the Navigation window will not use any resource of your computer and will automatically update itself with the project news once you will make it visible again Finally Ctrl Tab is a very useful shortcut that allows you to switch between the opened windows in the Application VIRTUAL NAVIGATION T Refresh 7 In case you cannot find the expected news when switching from the layout wall window to the Navigation Field Update Fortid one try to force the update by selecting the button Update view available in the Navigation group of the Ribbon see image on the left DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 54 Chapter 2 Navigation How to move With your mouse It is important to learn how to move in the Navigation window as the more expert you ll be in reaching the needed point of view the quicker you will design while in 3D Everyone has a mouse connected to the PC so let s start understanding how to move using the standard mouse buttons When you ope
60. the material has been assigned to is thin or not Object thickness in fact can interfere with reflection as well as refraction effects Use Max Distance this parameter allows you to specify if material refraction will manifest up to a certain distance DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 136 Chapter 5 Rendering Max Distance from this distance on referred to the current unit measure you selected in the application options you ll not see anymore the effect Fade to End Color if you enable this check refraction will fade assuming a particular color starting from Max Distance Color to Fade to this is the color refraction will fade to starting from Max Distance This color has a linear increasing ratio it doubles as you double the distance from the object Max Trace Depth allows you to reduce interaction between refraction rays and the object Do Refractive Caustics this option allows you to add to material standard refraction effect caustics effect too Generated shadow can be modified by this option Advanced parameters last group Back Face Culling when the parameter is enabled the surface viewing is disabled and its normal vectors are faced inwards thus making them invisible While using this feature the application that makes the outer wall of the room transparent just as it happens automatically during navigation without external light entering the room is very important Actually if you hide an inner wall facing the ca
61. the new one If the tile has been loaded in the library with more than one image the Application will take care of using all the available images off shaded effect You can check if there are available multiple images for the same item by double clicking over the tile image if there are multiple images the off shaded control will be checked and you will see those images looping in the preview section of the mask DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 68 Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials Using dynamic patterns The previous feature is very quick and useful when you need to tile the floor with just one tile If you need to cope with more than one format or with more complex patterns Dynamic patterns are your solution Open the Navigation window and select the Layings section in the Components window Search the pattern you want to work with and check the control panel in order to 1 Set the operation mood on the floor button A 2 Set the grout value and color you need for the floor B 3 Set the destination to Current room C Finally drag amp drop the pattern on the floor as you can see in the following image Components CMEC BS 1a TES ROME PAQDRECTS CHEST OF DRAWERS MLL TIPLE TILES STA FREE Sh Bete AE TC FURNISHING ELEMENTS PANELI Grout oo B II Rotala Height Girip o iin Ek 4 FHOTOI0 MATERIALS Now select Tiles section in Components window search for the tile you want to appl
62. the point of view Multiplier 0 1 10 this value allows you to specify Horizon height 10 10 this value allows you to than zero the height of the horizon light If you set the grey brown color which refers to the ground Horizon blur 0 10 this is a reference in order to the rendering scene as well as a round bright intersects the sun the intensity of sky light Default value is 1 move upper greater than zero or lower less 10 you will see just the sky blue and no more decide how to step from the brown earth area to the blue sky one Low values mean tough change strong division high values mean a foggy horizon area typical of hot days Sun disk Horizon blur 0 10 Horizon blur 0 50 Intensity 0 1 10 it is the intensity of the light used to simulate the sun 1 is the default value if you increase the value you ll see a brighter sun disk Scale 0 1 10 it is the sun dimension that s to say the radius of the sun disk Default value is 4 Glow 0 1 10 allows you to define the blur area all around the sun disk Default value is 1 Blur area can be increased just increasing the value of this field Default button in the previous mask allows you to restore ALL foresaid values to their standard DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 126 Chapter 5 Rendering Artificial lights Along with traditional artificial light sources consisting of an omni directional light bulb and
63. the shadow with different Roughness values Roughness 0 Roughness 80 Following parameters are related to reflection and refraction transparency effects Reflection and refraction are physic reactions when a beam of light interacts with any material When the energy of the light reaches the surface of the material a part of it is retained by the material itself a part of is reflected and a part of it is transmitted Reflection can be specular that s to say proceeding in one direction only blurred proceeds in a cone centred in the specular reflection or diffused proceeds in many directions DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 104 Chapter 5 Rendering blurred specular reflection P f ZA Zz 6 reflection diffused gi d reflection Thanks to Reflection Color you can control reflection quantity the brighter this color the stronger the reflection Black means that you do not have any reflection In the following images you can see the difference you get in reflection quantity as well as the Diffuse color behaviour in case you change the Reflection Color At the beginning left you see the real color of the sphere but by increasing the RGB value the sphere color becomes less visible and the reflection of the material is the only visible effect ty Diffuse Color E 204 51 66 Reflection Color FB 90 90 90 Diffuse Color GBB 204 51 66 Diffuse Color BB 204 51
64. these three units of measurement as they are not homogeneous Watt is the unit of measurement of power Candle is the unit of measurement of luminous intensity whereas the lumen is the unit of measurement of luminous flux A further option is available It is an alternative to the Preset choice that is the IES lights for these bulbs manufacturers release specific files ies that describe widely the irradiation phenomena Compared to other types of bulbs which radiate spherically 360 degrees in every direction these light bulbs are regulated as to their fluxes and intensities that may vary along each direction By choosing the right light source that is for example bulbs that do not radiate upward you may solve the problem of halos on the ceiling In the following examples you can see four types IES lights DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 128 Chapter 5 Rendering You can freely download IES files from the manufacturers sites In order to use the file in the program just paste the downloaded file in the folder DomuS3D2010 Lights Multiplier 1 1000 It shows the intensity of the light emission This is the only parameter on which you can operate in order to increase or decrease the brightness of a light source as to basic and physical light As to photometric lights this parameter is still on but it is not the only one the Intensity field may be also used Photons 0 1 000 000 you have already seen the meaning of photo
65. to the current rendering job Click this button if you want the computer to shut down when the rendering process has been finished and all the zo rendering jobs in the queue has been completed Click this button if you want to open the rendering job folder DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 142 Chapter 5 Rendering The rendering results If you double click one of the renderings that have been completed marked by the green check or you enter the related folder in the rendering jobs folder you will find a group of files similar to the one you can see in x Bathroom j wv Living the next image g RenderKitchen a Bitmap I Lights Ji Render di Temp im CPadana_Soggiorno4_VRc1_7_x2 jpg CPadana_Soggiorno4_VRc1_7_x2 log az CPadana_Soggiorno4_VRc1_7_x2 png _ CPadana_Soggiorno4_VRc1_7_x2 rpk Living zip a preview bmp a RENDER_PREVIEW_0 bmp In this folder you can see that there are sub folders containing the images of the tiles and materials used by the renderer You also see the file zip you formerly used in order to start the rendering job in this case Living zip The jpg and png files are related to the rendered image and are the ones you need to pick from here It is also important to notice that the rpk file is the file related to the project if you rename it in pjp you can import in the Application at any time In a way it is a backup pf the project at the time of the rendering Finally the o
66. transfer my project to a second installation How to make a copy of my project Close and save your project s Select command File mport Export Export project packages from the Home menu Select destination folder where to save it them finally select the project s you want to export On the second installation select __ command File Import Export Import project package s and select the former files _ Open it and select command File Save as Note that it is better to change customer name and or description in order to differentiate the projects How to create a bathtub washbasin DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide built in Try using self drilling object search them in the SEARCH field available in the Components window When dropping the item remember to use H key to _ automatically adjust the item elevation with the one of the container object 194 Appendix cannot insert a window on a wall Try to check the destination wall is it a single one or it is divided in two walls In this case you can join them deleting the corner in the middle Right click on it and select command Delete How to set my company data and Click the Company detailed data button in the Application preferences mask logo in the blueprints File gt Options Customize your data replacing the standard ones or create new Company with the New button How to change color finishing of an Select Material group in t
67. using all the available images off shaded effect You can check if there are available multiple images for the same item by double clicking over the tile image if there are multiple images the off shaded control will be checked and you will see those images looping in the preview section of the mask Tile all walls with a single tile solid pattern strip by strip From Chapter 4 Note that when you work on walls each time you drag amp drop a tile over a wall you create a new strip on it Basically you create a sort of dynamic panel by adding strip by strip sections to the panel Of course you have all the control you need in order to change the panel configuration anytime We will see how in the next few paragraphs Open the Navigation window and select the Tiles section in the Components window Search the tile you want to apply on the walls Before dragging the tile check the tiles control panel in order to Set the operation mood on the walls button A ga B Ei E A Set the grout value and color you need for the walls Grout 0 0 Rotation 0 0 Specify the number of tile lines you want in the strip B H rows 1B Strip New C In C you are telling the Application that you want to create a new Destination Align Left strip rather than applying the tile to an existing one ae a o 5 Set the destination to Current room D Now the Application knows the way you want to apply the tile so you can click the left
68. wanisesetiseunin een eens 144 VERGY FN OTS DOOKS secthisa raced oath a laens iia cutslsatann iy E A AE 144 VaR y Atalian DOOkS iiri als sues vdaisasaa nals E E nals aud E EEA E nek odaisand ah 144 CHAPTER 6 ESTIMATE PRINT SHARE ccsssssssssscccsssssssssssssssssccsccssssees 145 ESTIMATE rerien a e E A E wees cna cuneate Coast E UETA 145 Calculate the project estimate eeeeeeeseeseseeeeeeseserrrrrrrrrrrerrrerrrrrrrrerererereerreeeeeeeee 145 ODN ed OF CAT CA UO Oen E E A OSA 146 Change item s waste factOf oooooeeeeeeeesseeeseeeeseeerrrrrrerrrrrerrrrererrrererrerereereerrererrerereeeee 147 Exporttheestimat ienn a a a a a a aA 147 PUAN est O u ar E E E E E E T A O ERN 148 PRIN a E O E O E O E A O AN A E AA E A IAE 150 Blueprint Jor thetnstalle f ncinriiieranenriii aa E E EE 150 Floor Walls blueprint for the tstalle ra ccccccccccccccccccccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeees 152 Printproject s mmary sensi ie e E E E E a detant 153 SHARE eeraa Pe E A T OA a E OT E did O EO O 155 Share single TOON AIS sacs Sa sou asta cata da seas taan ce danda eee eae reels eases 155 Advaheed Fanorama s oie e E ialuetdsedetes 157 To chkiy modulen sen n A A a EE A A EA ST 157 CHAPTER 7 DATABASE vssssiascsesscasias rantsoenen aseran a iee ea ea rer ain eaa iaa 158 MAINTENANCE ipee eE A E TE EA A E UNUE AEU E E UA 158 Backup procedure for the Standalone Version ccccccccccccccccccccccccecceecceesessessseseseeess 158 Backup procedure
69. want to start seeing the ssu project in 3D You can do this in 3 different ways creen management 1 Select the Navigate button available in the Ribbon refer to Virtual Navigation group 2 Use keyboard shortcut F6 unless you have customized it in a different way 3 Click the right mouse button wherever apart on the existing entities in the layout desktop and select command Virtual navigation as you can see in this image If the Navigation window is already opened by selecting one of the aforementioned commands will not open a second navigation but will make the existing one visible top of windows Please note that you do not have to close the Navigation window once you go back to the layout you can leave it opened and keep on working in the layout or the tiling window While hidden in fact the Navigation window will not use any resource of your computer and will automatically update itself with the project news once you will make it visible again Finally Ctrl Tab is a very useful shortcut that allows you to switch between the opened windows in the Application VIRTUAL NAVIGATION T Navigate the scene in 3D With your mouse From Chapter 2 It is important to learn how to move in the Navigation window as the more expert you ll be in reaching the needed point of view the quicker you will design while in 3D Everyone has a mouse connected to the PC so let s start understanding how to move using the standard mouse button
70. way Length of displacement maps affects an off shaded tile Diffuse maps boiles d 1Jjpq boiles b jpg boiles b 3 Jpg Activate Activate File i File Length i Length Shift Shift DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 116 Chapter 5 Rendering In the Advanced section there is a Displacement group containing parameters and effects which are the same as the VRayDisplacementMod available in 3ds max DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 117 Chapter 5 Rendering Following images show you the difference between Bump and Displacement Map Bump Map Activate File BOISERIE_bump jpg Multiplier 6 00 Displacement map Activate File BOISERIE_displ jpg Length 2 0 Materials Advanced parameters The reflective materials tend to generate specular highlights or rough spots The more a material is reflective the more you can see the reflections of the light on the object the material has been assigned to By changing Reflection Color and Reflection Glossiness you can obtain all the real reflection effects you have in real life As you have seen before by lowing down Reflection Glossiness you can see wider extensions highlight If you want to reduce the highlight from a reflective surface you just need to disable Highlight Glossiness Lock and specify a value for Highlight Glossiness considering that low values will generate glossy highlights 1 will totally delete highlight effect DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 118 Ch
71. with the left mouse button keepit pressed and move the sun where you need to get the illumination you re searching for Such a movement affects both Elevation as well as Azimuth see next 90 Azimuth 180 180 this value is specified in degrees and reveals the sun s position in the horizon Again use left mouse button as seen before in order to change Elevation and Azimuth 180 180 0 Environment Environment section affects the indirect light coming from the sky Let s see it in detail 90 Type in this field you can choose whether to use sky colour rather than a custom colour for the environment illumination A sky colour as seen before will create a blue light A custom one will make the scene being illuminated from all directions by a light defined in the next 2 fields colour and multiplier The next images can give a clear idea of the result you ll get by changing those parameters _ 255 255 255 10 000 00 J 255 255 255 10 000 00 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 96 Chapter 5 Rendering In the next images you can see how in these circumstances the custom colour will be seen in the background too unless you decide to use a background image refer to the Navigation chapter in order to learn how to apply background flat and spherical images In such a situation custom colour affects the indirect light of the scene just in case Saturation is different than zero in the next images it s
72. you need brighter areas Fast Glossy Interpolation Interpolation grid Density you can use this option in order to obtain blur reflection and refraction effects reducing time to render This parameter hence represents the resolution density of the grid used in order to calculate reflection refraction blur in a way defining blur quality Low resolutions mean less time to render but also less quality and blur details Refl neigh points to look up this is the number of points of the scene placed all around the position in which the application needs to calculate the blur effect These points will make the grid which is the basis for the calculation procedure Use high detail distance this parameter allows you to use a higher number of rays in order to get more detailed effects Single Sample from Environment when you want to create render images containing blurred reflections you usually use a lot of rays samples coming from outdoor If you enable this check you ask the application to use just one single ray This tip can be useful in order to prevent environment generic blur Refr neigh points to look up this is the number of points of the scene placed around the specific point where you want to calculate blur reflection These points will make the grid which is the basis for the calculation procedure Advanced Reflection options Use max distance this parameter allows you to specify if material reflection will manifest up
73. you see it click the left mouse button on the object image keep the mouse pressed 3 Move the mouse over the layout and release the mouse button 4 Move the object to the place you want to drop it 5 Click the left mouse button in order to drop it Y As already seen with doors the object will automatically rotate and align p itself to the wall as soon as you move the mouse over the internal side of a wall When aligned to the wall the double measure system will appear in order to let you see the distance between the object and the left right corner of the wall it is aligned to You can click the left mouse button in order to definitively place it in the position where the mouse is or you can start typing the exact measure using the left right distance you can switch between the two by clicking the keyboard button DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 40 Quick Step Guide While dragging the object in the layout you can use the E keyboard buttons in order to rotate the object by 45 for anticlockwise for clockwise While dragging the object in the layout you can use the R keyboard button in order to rotate the object by an angle different than 45 and also in order to quickly change its elevation from the floor How to open Navigation From Chapter 2 If you just created your first project the only opened window apart the LivePage of the project is the Layout So you need to open the Navigation window once you
74. you want to get to Here s a list of available properties you can work with available in the mask while selecting Photographic button Exposure control section allows you to operate on typical values generally used by photographers Exposure Control exposure in fact talks about the quantity of light arriving to the film through a camera in a given time Type Photographic z If you know how to manually use a camera you also will probably understand at a glance what we re Preset indoor Daylight talking about we will introduce anyway all this parameters in order to explain the way they affect the Parameters final rendering It ll be easy to understand what s going on also thanks to a dynamic preview button as that allows you to immediately have a small preview of the scene even without render it all Vignetting We therefore recommend to use this setting which allows you to refine the correct exposure Sa of assessments In this way the scene can be more or less illuminated more or less contrasted according _ to your needs DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 121 Chapter 5 Rendering When you click over Photographic button you open the Rendering Preview mask where you can interact with each photographic effect and see the scene preview clicking on button Generate preview First preview generation will take a bit more time than the following ones after first generation the button text
75. 3D objects libraries in this way you can see what s new coming from Maticad Catalogues Department catalogues if you have joined the Catalogues Download Service you can start downloading tiles objects materials catalogues in order to use them while designing and planning Later on in this chapter you will see how to register for catalogues download projects in this section you can open one of the latest projects you have worked on rather than searching a previous one or creating a new one sample projects section available starting from 2 release allows you to download sample projects that Maticad shares with you Those projects will allow you to deepen certain features and tricks of the Application as there will be available also a brief description of what s interesting in the project and many more features as this is a web page consider that its appearance may vary as Maticad could change its format and or add delete web services and features DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 20 Initial operations and configurations settings new You can customize the Live page sections by dragging and dropping them in a different position in the window Pick the box you want to move in the title with the left mouse button keeping it pressed move it in the new position Ribbon If you have closed the Live page and want to open it again click the Home button in the Live Section of the Ribbon as you HOME DATABASE Rectangle
76. 4 Virtual navigation in 3D a It is now time to see how the project looks like in 3D that means to navigate the scene Click the Ribbon button Navigate or the right mouse button and select command Virtual Navigate Navigation b You can move just with your mouse combining the use of the 3 buttons you have available Here s how to move I Use left mouse button in order to rotate and tilt the point of view in all directions I Use right mouse button in order to move forward and back or to shift left right if Use wheel mouse button to increase decrease elevation of the point of view from the floor Try navigating the scene and check if everything s in the right place 5 Automatically change object elevation a We now have to place a Tap over the bidet Leave the Navigation window open and switch back to the layout window As usual we go first to the Components window in order to select the tap to use in our project b We ll follow the same steps we already learnt but before releasing the tap we need to specify that we want it at the correct elevation so that it will lay exactly over the bidet But what s the exact height of the bidet Of course we do not know it so the Application will help us defining correct elevation Let s see how in next step c While you are still moving the object over the layout select i keyboard button H stands for Height you can see that the object temporarily is in
77. 66 Diffuse Color E 204 51 66 Diffuse Color _ Reflection Color J 40 40 40 Reflection Color E 0 0 0 Diffuse Color Diffu HB 204 51 66 Reflection Color TB 20 20 20 B 204 51 66 E 204 51 66 Diffuse Color l 204 51 6 L 255 255 255 240 240 Reflection Color Diffuse Color E 204 51 66 me 204 3 _ 240 240 240 jse fe 204 51 66 Diffuse Color Reflection Color 130 130 130 Reflection Color If you do not want the Reflection to be uniform on the material you can control it by using a dedicated Map enable the Active control in the Reflection Map group click the File field and again browse for the map to be used We ll take care of maps later on in this chapter In the example we will use a reflection map made by a collection of black and white squares You will quickly understand that white map means totally reflecting black map means no reflection Of course the map can contain grey scale levels in order to distribute reflection in a softer way Look at the next image in order to see the result of such a map DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 105 Chapter 5 Rendering If you want to have blurred reflections you need to control the Reflection glossiness parameter 100 means a strong reflection typical of chrome materials while getting to zero makes the material glossier and increase the time for rendering Reflection Reflection Reflection Colo
78. 875 f number 8 00 shutter speed s 1 58 69 Controllo esposizione film speed ISO 100 00 3 Vignetting 0 00 Opzioni n Bianco L 255 25 Salva ser Light Cache Only i LC Subdivs 200 Mostra opzioni avanzate Spegni automaticamente il PC al termine dell operazione Prefiltering light cache done LC Sample Size 1 Impostazioni predefinite Panorama 5 Ti oe Carica Salva Calcola an alkImage F 7 a teprima Crea job Panorama ok Cancel gt Rendering speed benchmarks made in the test period report that with the same computers projects and materials in the scene V Ray is quicker in generating the rendering images gt Displacement V Ray offers the same bump mappings as mental ray plus the displacement option which is typical for materials that have a thickness or relief such as stone With V Ray you can start creating 3D tiles still planning them with the simplicity of 2D images gt Ra E coire mitina eo gt Sfecatura nfagecce 100 f Quettd afecatuns 8 Fresnel refectan i Mappa E Soak mappalun ig oer Dynamic rendering with V Ray RT jii The V Ray standard engine uses the internal CPU for the rendering process You can decide indeed to use V Ray RT N engine RT means Real Time and is equipped with the standard one in order to be able to use GPU for rendering AS you know GPU is dramatically quicker than CPU hence having fast NVIDIA graphic cards may result in sm
79. A aT Di T Ba ee a Bade Temra Pioda a ore ELAI Bii a SEH Bd Bate Jemna Hele a prre OOH Bi SB Ress Tamines piris jemis Ti i EJ B r LD E Deer Tema hoiate cAi Dir Hi D a A a L my Lm a a ped 20 hcman Come Cari FE 3 timpa por cance Rams ome Dorwi3D Pegasus Mobili componibili See Pt oe mis moe ax mann Fikiri piinas na EE a tive Honmera pnfureimme MEE Componenti A Unies Bard Don A oda on Teed oe leo a as 2 EEP i fol a0 2A v eo wwe it a Ojon un 3 a 20 38 20 E ee E o E E 7 z x eof Pc iE F 2 Aa rh a 3 TED i I i lt Miser A Zepa leili s Biji ey E E H 4 F a zi B R F 7 i i 3 e al sl z x amp il 3 Hopie oi pea Viy aai eT ey D ee ory F i A f 1 5 E E 5 f i E E iti GR opns O Emman come DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 205 Contacts Support Team We are ready to side you since the first day of your DomuS3D experience in order to help you quickly becoming productive efficient and winning in your marketing with DomuS3D With this aim the Support Team is available for users who have joined the technical support annual fee You can contact Support Team by writing an e mail to support domus3d com or by phone calling 39 0721 63 91 66 When contacting us over the phone for technical purposes keep your customer code in front of you as the automatic access procedure will ask you to dial it before getting to the S
80. ATION TOOLS DATABASE OOND MMe CHAM a A e 03 ap atie A P L VY d Dimension 4 gt l N Line Rectangle Circle Arch Curves Polyline Polyline by Room by gt 4 gt Duplicate Rotate Scale Stretch Mirror Trim Extend Fillet Chamfer selection selection X X x Delete Draw Modify M a S erms DomuS 3D Pegasus Layout Dinal FILE HOME LAYOUT CAD VIRTUAL NAVIGATION TOOLS DATABASE M Attachments a 8 Point Info Sa Export om le pet Ir l gpr r e M a S Te B FS fa Properties dis w Distance Info Ss Print a Share Zoom Visibility Calculate Paper Web Print Blueprint for Floor Walls blueprint Distinta F3 E Stats M Floor area Send Layout Layout the installer forthe installer base Project Tools Estimate Layout Print a omu egasus Layout Dina MaS erm DomuS3D Peg Layout Dinal FILE HOME LAYOUT CAD VIRTUAL NAVIGATION TOOLS DATABASE Be OM eZ Update 2E Import Export v 2e F n i a g Ao Ase so om og S i Py Create Index tA Formats as nP Load IdentiTile Ds Tiles Model Panels m MOSAICS Elements Import Elements Import catalogue top management Models Management X management Export material Export Catalogue IdentiTile Tiles Panels MOSAICS Furnishing elements Materials 4l id a e Some buttons and commands have been moved Customize Quick Access Toolbar in order to create a better organization of the os E a JE command grou
81. C Light x 6304 402 7 Target x 1 0 Ti 15i Target Light Features Attenuator de tance l Light baam sine H J Dhak ria 20 0 Preart 0 0 ii f riei a pet Jie IES fie Now open the Natural light properties mask if you are in the Layout window the button is in the Virtual Navigation section of the Ribbon and it is called Natural light If you are in Navigation window the name of the button is the same available in Navigation section of the Ribbon Set the Natural light properties as you see in the following image Natural light Sun light Activate Multiplier 0 1 10 1 00 Scale 01 10 1 00 Invisible E Soft shadow quali 3 Turbidity 3 00 Ozone 0 35 Environment type sky color 255 255 25 3 Elevation 0 90 Azimuth 180 180 Daytime preset 12 Setting up rendering parameters now you re ready to launch the rendering process While in the Navigation window and in the correct point of view select command Full image click the Exposure control button should still be set on Automatic and in type section choose Photographic In Color Mapping section set type to Linear and Bright multiplier to 0 80 this will reduce the over bright effect you have near the window The correct Exposure value for this scene is 8 3 See next image You re done click OK and start rendering the scene DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 190 The Sample Project Preview resolution
82. CAD 2D by right clicking the mouse you can anytime decide to stop drawing for open polylines or close it If you decide to close it the Application will ask you if you want to use such shape to create a room or an object This is the most common and used CAD 2D feature in order to draw objects and new rooms Polyline from selection this command allows you to group different entities in a single polyline Remember that all entities have to be connected each other that shape can be a closed or open one In order to create a polyline from selection select all the entities by picking them one by one with the left mouse button or dragging it in order to include all of them and click right button once selection is complete Room by selection this command allows you to convert a group of entities to a room There are conditions in order to be able to run this command the entities you are going to select have to be one connected to the other describing a closed shape Moreover all those entities have not to be inside an existing room Any new room in fact has to be designed outside the existing ones Text this command allows you to draw text and descriptions wherever in the desktop Select the point where to start drawing the text the height of the letters by using the left mouse button or typing its value the orientation of the text horizontal diagonal and finally you will access the mask where to type the text you need and choose the tex
83. D Pegasus User Guide 132 Chapter 5 Rendering Diffuse level 50 Diffuse level 100 Diffuse color is the main color of the object Roughness controls how quickly the diffuse component blends into the ambient component The diffuse component uses the Oren Nayar shading model Typically for a common rough material this parameter can be 20 while a polished one can be 0 Reflection level is the parameter to be used in order to change the way object reflects light Increasing it will make the object more reflecting For example mirrors could reach even 100 maximum Reflection color is the color of the reflected and or diffused light Default is white Reflection glossiness blur allows you to get blur reflections 100 maximum means good total reflection lower values will give you blur effects depending on the value material As an example let s see how this effect is referred to mirrors Refl gloss 100 Refl gloss 50 Refl gloss 10 Glossiness blur quality scale of the quality you need to achieve for blur effects If you increase this parameter results are more accurate but time to render will increase too Suggested value is around 32 Fast interpolate fast method to be used in order to get blur reflections Not to be used in case you do not have plane sections on the objects Fast no ray if you enable this check reflected rays are not 100 real as just the rays related to the light emitter will be
84. D Wall Panel Ctrl Shift Z Zoom max Layout 2D Wall Panel Ctrl F2 Print project folder Layout Print Layout Layout Ctri H Share project by e mail publish on web publish on Android iOS Tablet All CtrI Alt O Open program preferences Options All Ctrl E Ctrl F3 Print technical details for the installer Layout Alt L Draw line CAD 2D Tools Layout Alt R Draw rectangle CAD 2D Tools Layout AIt A Draw arch by point point radius in CAD 2D Tools Layout Alt C Draw circle by centre radius in CAD 2D Tools Layout Alt P Draw polyline CAD 2D Tools Layout Shift L Open the sun natural light properties mask Layout Ctrl L New light Layout Alt L Delete light Layout Ctrl M Open the project materials control panel Layout Ctrl 1 Move the observer in the centre of the room Navigation Ctrl 2 Move the observer on the left side of the room Navigation Ctrl 3 Move the observer on the right side of the room Navigation Ctrl 4 Move the observer to the top of the room Navigation Ctrl 5 Move the observer to the bottom of the room Navigation Ctrl 6 Move the observer in order to see the room from above Navigation eilai Move the observer to the previous saved view if any Navigation Navigation Ctrl Right arr Move the observer to the next saved view if any Ina multi room project allows you to switch the active room Navigation DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 23 Initial operations and configurations settings Properties panel The Application Properti
85. Intro Subdivide room feature allows to draw internal walls and split existing room in 2 rooms Chapt 1 Strips on the wall can be moved up down for a better customization Chapt 4 Strip height can be changed both manually and or by specifying number of tiles Chapt 4 New patterns available from Ceramic Tiles Manufacturers ed Generic improvements on features ref detailed list in appendix Appendix Controls order in Tile Shower Box Corner mask Chapt 4 Quick switch between standard and accurate estimate calculation in Estimate Window Chapt 6 Integration with IMOS Net and ArredoCAD optional Chapt 9 New engine for the new Navigation Module Chapt 2 Oculus Rift V Ray rendering engine optional Chapt 5 Distributed rendering optional Chapt 5 New Render Manager optional Chapt 5 Integration with TilePlanner the project made by the end user on the Web can be imported in DomuS3D fa DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 14 Hardware and Software requirements Introduction The hardware and software requirements needed for the correct operation of the program may vary depending on the modules used while operating rendering procedures and designing multi rooms scenes need more powerful systems In the next table we list the suggested hardware configuration those details marked as recommended are important if you plan to use the Advanced features for the Application such as the Rendering Operating System Hard Disk Graph
86. Manual is a general guide that contains all the necessary information that enables the users to work with the program The manual is structured in order to provide you the most important information regarding the different sections of the application This manual refers to DomuS3D Pegasus application compatible with Windows Vista with SP2 Windows 7 with SP1 Windows 8 1 operating systems and available in 2 different versions Single license also called stand alone license it is the normal single user licence that requires a USB hardware key also called dongle in order to operate The program can be installed on multiple computers but the program will start and run only if the dongle is plugged in Client Server Licence usually used for multiple workstations designers sharing the same database catalogues installed on a server machine This installation requires a connection to multiple computers either through a local area network LAN or through a geographic network on Internet support VPN provided it is high performing in terms of efficiency and speed of data transfer In this case the protection dongle will be plugged in just in the server machine or any other PC of the network provided that it ll be always switched on The designer will be able to connect from any computer of the network profiling with his username and password The System Administrator will take care of creating backups just on the server and we encourag
87. Multiplier field allows you to indicate the resolution of the rendered image depending on the current resolution of the scene aspect ratio will remain the same and you can easily increase for print options or decrease for sample purposes the final image Pixel Resolution field on the right will show you the final resolution value for the rendered image Low quality procedure allows you to render in just one step with less accuracy regarding lights setup this is because in this procedure the system does not use Indirect illumination which is very important in order to get a real scene something very like a photograph While trying to setup the rendering then low quality is useful if you need to understand if objects and tiles have been correctly placed It is NOT useful and correct while setting up lights as the result would not be real For lights we suggest you to step at least to medium quality which is the right compromise between time to render the sample and result you get Finally you ll launch high quality rendering once everything is correct in the scene and you want to start creating the final effective image You know at this stage that time to render will take longer depending on the computer s hardware and the complexity of the project Even if you select one of the preset quality settings you can modify anyway its properties really this can be useful in order to change the setup just a bit living the image the effects
88. NE SOFTWARE Wow6432Node MATICAD DOMUS3D 14 0 Lang _ Lang value is ENG ITA FRA ESP DEU CZE RUS ROM HEB POR HUN GRE SER CRO POL ARA Error Current codepage is incompatible stops working starting client with following message Components Loading progress in Error DomuS3D a Try to check your language settings Your system language should match the language settings of the installed database There is a restriction network settings Your window user cannot browse the shared folder for the projects and catalogues available on the server already connected It is impossible to open a new session for this user Your user seems to be Maybe your DomuS3D formerly wasn t closed correctly Try logging with the same username on _ the PC where DomuS3D crashed DomuS3D suddenly stopped working This can be due to a lot of reasons One of them can be the antivirus Disconnect the network cable try to disable your antivirus for a while and try using DomuS3D again If this is the reason when enabling again the antivirus exclude DomuS3D folder from the antivirus operations Sentinel Hasp Error when starting software Be sure your key is plugged in the USB Port and red light is on If necessary you can download up to date hardware key drivers from the DomuS3D official website http www domus3d com en public_area support_area download html and update it
89. OF USE 1 Terms of use 2 General dispositions The images the technical and commercial information and the data concerning the download of the reques ance with Art 1341 and 1342 d c Parties after careful reading and rereading each clause of the state accept the following terms of use noo H EMPTY CART 4 IMPORT SELECTED ELEMENTS Furnishing Elements 2 Materials 6 Advanced Materials 6 Total size 227 15 MB Estimated download time 0 hours 15 minutes ana 30 seconds with ADSL 21 hours 2 minutes anc Accept the terms of use of the catalogue download service click on yes finally click che IMPORT SELECTED ELEMENTS button in order to start downloading the items on your computer As the download procedure could take a few minutes hours depending on the size of the download and or the speed of your Internet connection while downloading you can keep on worlking with the Application If you want to know the status of the download click the button in the HOME group of the Ribbon called Catalogues loading Don t be afraid if your download has not been completed and you need to shut down the compter as the Application will automatically pause it keepng the status and start it again next time it runs Step 5 5 install catalogues At the end of the download in the Live page you will see a message by the Application that notifies the avaialbility of the new collections on your computer
90. OO ONE ONE 121 Launch the rendering process oooooooooooeeeooeeosseeesesensessseeeseesesseeeeeeeeenssssssssssssssssssse 121 Lights management was sates saiecnctisinastuntatancscuiniateaiubamecasunabeecumsanrainadeainmaacrasenaenaieees 124 Natural light sun LD OTIG ics lactation ede ectla eda Salta Dies eli et ia OSE a 124 Ariea QVIES aise Net case ase Se IS eI a Ma aCe a CMe eS a aed 127 Light diffused by doors and windows Portal light cccccccccccccccccccccscscesecsssseeeeeees 130 Managing materials textures and effects cccccccccccccccccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 131 Materials for objects and furnishing ClOMents ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccesseeseeseseseeeeees 131 Managing materials while inside a project ccccccccccccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeeeeees 131 Managing materials from application AAtaDASE ccccccccccccccccccceeeeeceeseeeseeseeseseeees 138 Materials for til S oooooooeeennennnnnnennnensneessessssssssseseeseesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssso 139 RENDER MANAGER vrasin S A rE A TEREE E E R 140 EL A E E EE E E E E E E E E AA 140 Therenderin o obrona e E E entices 140 How to use Render Manager nai nena aera Nae Rew 141 The rendering results oooooeeeeeeeeseeseseeseeeseerrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrereerereeerererrererererererrrereereeee 143 BIBLOGRATHN n a AAEE NEA IO ERONEN ONORE ON 144 mental ray English books taci0 Sion CRS ARG 144 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide mental ray Italian DOOKS
91. Pegasus User Guide 199 Appendix Estimate Estimate window now gives you the opportunity of changing the algorithm for calculating quantities As you can see in the image you have 2 different options Live X Layout Dinal X Virtual navigation X Melee gt Automatic waste this is the standard BB i Grouped by room algorithm used by the Application The No waste Application knows that every time you cut a tile you have to consider a waste factor INFISSI SPECIALI FIN ARCO 2 ANTB Window arched wooden 2doors 1 00 For this reason if you are using more than aa AGATAS AGATA Port embossed wenge amp Glass 1 00 50 of a tile the Application adds the woes Sta excl TOSAL BROWN 50 63 00 complete tile to the Estimate as the rest E UT i el ASPEN MARFIL is considered waste MARAZZI ESPANA CM55 ANTARES 38 MARFIL a j Room 2 gt No waste calculation refers to theoretical B a ade area covered by the tile without any waste The area of the surface floor wall is mathematically divided by the area of the tile You can now change the algorithm method dynamically in the Estimate window checking the difference with or without the waste factor In any case you still have the control on the waste factor as you can type the value you need in the dedicated column Waste V Ray new rendering engine DomuS3D Pegasus allows you to choose between the most powerful and professional rendering engines in the world Togeth
92. QUA Material list in project e Load Copy Delete A Assign 2 ROSB_O PIETRA_BIANCA FLUORESCENTE Bianco_semnilu ERBA If you click on you ll be able to load in the project from the application database one of the existing materials in order to assign them to objects and furnishings In order to choose among available materials you ll step through the Materials selection mask This is a sort of filter where you can specify the name of the material you d like to load and or the specified typology in order to select one of the woods or marbles etc Perce ie an Search items using available fields If you leave empty fields you ll select all items Use char for generic search criteria Name Type Type f WOOD v DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 137 Chapter 5 Rendering In case you want to modify one of the materials loaded in the project this will NOT modify the original material available in the application database you can click on or double click over the material preview in order to access Material parameters mask where you can change one or more parameters among available set If you modify such project material you do not have to assign it again to all objects as they will change automatically providing you the new effects you ve set up button allows you to duplicate selected material in order to keep the original one in case you need it in the futu
93. SUPPORT ici rosis Aii TEA ATERA A NAET 176 Learning how to use Arredocad ccccccccccccccccccceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeecceseeseeesesess 176 Company details recreen ene a a a a aea 176 SUPPONI a ae E E EE A E a A ERE NOSE Pn 176 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide THE SAMPLE PROJECT roana shuns E E Ea i 177 Layouten e EE E lle ee teh EE S 178 Doors and WING OWS eon EEEE E TE AE 179 Placing Objects ororena aa aa a a A a e A 180 Tile the floO ra A E E EE E E E E TS 183 Tewa S e are ete ES 184 Changing walls material eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseennererrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreressrereesereerrereererrereeeeeee 187 Rendering the scene with V RaY esooesseeeonnesnnnnsnssesssnensensesseoeeeeeeeennossssssssssssssse 189 Download Sample PTOJECi moriis E EEEa E 191 PARR DS scscssssvisesiesvesbasbawadeissavecesvbavsakiveswcsasnsanseivanseseuuasssesasasescaneasssdsuensecessbiesstasawaierioss 192 APPENDEX rann A E N 192 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS FAQ esessesssseesseressrrssserssrerssrrssersserssrrrsscrssetrssresssereseereseeresee 192 OLUE ON ENEE O N O 192 Installation Upgrade ooooooeeeeeenenennneeneenesssesssseseseeesseeenesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssse 192 Starting CDI C ANON sitasiute sabe daiatantuatubatectaasandsduesabstiveteseiuasabusiuasa soa uasabesaiacasonaiesalt 193 PADOS EEEE a tivad sateen Sutal dieu ann tyiah aaa gunhata EE E TA 193 Lwe PATO EE E CRE eT ANE COTTE CET ETTORE TERY On VCE Cn POE TET OMT Cr Teer 194 PPI CCL sii aes
94. Standalone version if you close the Application you can also save the Application folder as it contains all data you need to restore the program on a new PC l Try to find it out with the Show command from the Database group in the Ribbon _ Tiles management Show Elements ManagementShow Issue Solution We didn t receive any answer regarding our catalogue requested Login error _ lost my password Installing downloaded items seems not to work green bar still appears after tried to load them _ catalogue Timeout error during downloading Maticad is not involved in the authorization process the Manufacturers directly manage your catalogue request Contact directly the Company and ask for the person who manages DomuS3D to speed up the process Be sure you used the complete and correct email address and password If you forgot the password you can click the link click here to obtain a new one Indeed if you need to change username you can make a new registration with a new email address _ Click the link Click here to obtain a new one Close your DomuS3D go in the DomuS3D Import folder and delete all files Open again the Application and try downloading again the catalogue May depend on your connection speed Try again in case selecting less catalogues _ so that your connection can afford the download size in MB Project Issue Solution How can
95. UDIO STAR L criteria and the items selection to refer to If you want to rollback your selection click CANCEL or delete the text and press keyboard button Alternatively you can browse the component window depending on the structure it is based on After Application setup the first level is Macro typology it is a list of main sections the objects refer to If you click one of them you will see all typologies related to that Macro typology Indeed if you wan to avoid Macro typology selection which means to see ALL available typologies click FORWARD Once you select a typology you can see a list of all Manufacturers available in this selection Once you see the needed object A metal ladder for bur click it over the preview image drag and drop it in the scene If you want to customize the order for browsing open the Options section you find at the bottom of the panel Note it is not the Application Options command Look at the Components Options button in the image on the left Here in you can find several controls that allow you to customize the components section dedicated to Furnishing Elements Tapata Slide down to the Filters section and here proceed enabling disabling the Manufacturer categories you want to see hide or move them up or down depending the Supplier order you want to see while browsing ARCHITECTURAL BATHROOM BEDROOM FURNITURE KITCHEM LIVING ROOM OFFICE OUTDOOR 629 2 STUDIO STAR F PROFILE S
96. User Guide 208 index 3dconnexion 56 3DS 62 3dwarehouse 160 Affect Shadows 112 Align 61 alignment 76 Anisotropy 119 Arch 46 Arch amp Design 104 area light 99 area lights 100 ArredoCAD 174 Assign material 67 automatic rotation 61 Available languages 18 Azimuth 96 B background 57 73 97 195 196 199 Backup Client Server version 158 Standalone version 158 BRDF 119 Bright 87 bright multiplier 86 Bump 118 Bump Maps 115 CAD 2D 63 CAD 2D tools 46 Catalogues Download 35 Change 71 ChaosGroup 89 Client Server 11 12 21 26 120 158 COLLADA 62 63 Color Bleeding 85 Color mapping 86 Color Mapping 87 Columns 49 components window 59 Components window 30 Configuration 11 12 55 Contacts 206 Copy 64 Corner 51 countertop 79 CS 12 CUDA 89 Curves 47 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 209 DAE 63 160 Dark 87 dark multiplier 86 Database group objects together 161 load multiple tiles 159 load new object 160 load pricelist from account sw 162 new tile 159 Day time 97 Delete 64 71 Detailed position 61 Diffuse 105 Diffuse Color 111 113 diffuse lighting 102 Diffuse Map 104 Diffused Color 104 Dimension 47 Displacement Map Comparison with Bump 118 Download of single objects 38 Duplicate 64 DXF 62 160 Dynamic image 89 dynamic panel 73 dynamic patterns 69 76 effects 57 Elevation 95 96 Environme
97. YSTEMS gt gt gt gt gt gt gt THERMOHYDRAULIC A Options Filters Macro typology Series We encourage you spending a few seconds in order to optimize at least Furnishing Elements and Tiles components as they are crucial while designing a good organization for these groups will allow you finding the items you need in just a few clicks Placing doors and windows Architectural elements such as doors and windows usually are the first items to be placed in the project When you install the software you already have some doors and windows in the Application library First of all open the layout window of the project as doors and windows can be placed just in this window Next step is to search for the door you want to place in the project in the components section the vertical panel on the left unless you have moved it somewhere else in the Application desktop click the FURNISHING ELEMENTS panel You can browse the library by selecting the related Macro Typology Architectural the Typology Doors or Dynamic Doors finally the Manufacturer you want to refer to Now you should have a list of doors available in the preview section of the component DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 59 Chapter 3 Elements Keep pressed the left mouse button on the preview image and drag the door in the layout window now that you are over the project you can release the left button You can see that while moving the mous
98. a stand by status as the Application is now asking you to specify the object in the layout you want the tap to stand on for this purpose select one of the lines of the bidet with the left mouse button Now the tap has the correct elevation from the flor and you can drop it in the correct position d Ifthe grid snap does not allow you to place the tap in the correct position click i keyboard button or Snap status bar button 4 in order to temporarily enable disable the grid snap also remember that you can zoom in out using the wheel mouse button and Pan the desktop by keeping pressed the wheel mouse button e Go back in the Navigation window and check if result is the correct one DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 181 The Sample Project f If elevation is still not correct you can click the right mouse button over the tap select Properties and manually change elevation Let s save project by selecting the button on top of the Ribbon ia or clicking the keyboard buttons 6 Recessed self drilling washbasin a Look back at the image of the bathroom you have in the first page of this tutorial we ll now create the countertop for the washbasins b Let s draw the countertop first In the layout window open the CAD section of the Ribbon Select command Rectangle so that you can draw a rectangular shape Manually draw the first point of the rectangle with the mouse pointing at the lower left corner of the room and type th
99. ad Candela cd 7 Use lES file 161 Soft Shadows area lights No effect Width Rectangula Circular 1 0 Height Spherical Radius Cylindrical 3 Soft Shadows Quality Cancel Advanced button available in the light properties window allows you to access a new mask where you can find further and new details to work onto please remember that such properties are referred just to lights used within the advanced rendering engine projects Basic Light is the easiest type of light source commonly used with the standard rendering engine We recommend to use it if an advanced engine is available Physical Light if compared with basic light the physical light gives a high standard of realism especially when the light faints and fades as you move away from the source From a physics standpoint optics by activating this option the fading occurs in proportion to the square of the distance i e with a more realistic accelerated progression whereas on basic light the fading takes a linear form i e more gradual and steady We recommend you to enable this option whenever you want to use a neon light For other types of lighting we recommend the use of photometric lighting which represents a qualitatively higher level and closer to reality Base Light Physical Light DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 127 Chapter 5 Rendering Photometric light several are the theories describing the light beh
100. ada eater aaadtal aeiaaeeaeltas 63 MODIFICATION sah Moe S N aad Nurmi anes A E N S sauna eeueid lanes 64 MOVE aa E N lama etannGacean dem tamanesa E ea noe waan N 64 PROUD E ATI de att Sa i hel IE eG AE iP E AAAA 64 Copy Duplicate dieno eer teehee tee hae irc a 64 TOV 1 PENEAN AN Sn 8 Oi EEA ANNA A EAN lela Cond ici cosas aed 64 Changa Ob CCl SiE RESE N Secession Oa E 65 Stretch the object Extend sist castes astute stata divide tulie a ddiienicadainidbatebide seutinidiatticst 65 MIOT oes Site occ aS rst arse EEEN eee Unica eee iat gatas 66 Modifyatems details ricine e a eiDha a cinbiee cad A 66 MATERIA ES neeo nite AES AA ES E E AOE A 66 Check existi os Oe REE E A a A N a a onenyeC Cnr Rane 66 Assign new from components window cccccccessccscccccceeceeeceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesaaaaaaaaas 67 Assign material to all walls and Ce1ling cccccccccccccccccccccccccceccccceccccceccececeeeaaaaaaaaaas 67 CHAPTER 4 LAYING COVERING MATERIALS sesseecseeccssssssssscccccccceessssssosooe 68 COVER THE FLOOR sci srssdeusvasass A ATA AEA IA AE N A E A E E A EN 68 With a single tile solid pattern seeoeeennnnnnnnnnnnnnnseesersserrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrererrrerrreeerreee 68 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide OST dynami PAM CTI isa recess sous ose sd sean ead E ea ee se aa 69 Change the grout of existing PALLCTUS fei cs cdi laicd he ucdialascdchesvadietetel dblussedsediesiens 70 Change the origin Starting point Of the PALteN cccccccccccccccccccc
101. age But realistically we know that very few people read technical books that way Everyone reads and absorbs information in their own way so you re going to use this book any way you please But just as a suggestion if you re starting to use DomuS3D right now we d recommend that you have at least a quick look at Part1 The Software Setup and Configuration you carefully read through Part 3 The Software User Manual and finally to practice using the Sample Project you can find in Part 4 If you re in a hurry to get started or you already have practiced a bit on DomuS3D focus on the single paragraphs related to the features you want to get deeper in for this purpose the Table of Contents lists all the features described in this version of the Manual so it will help you finding the feature you want to learn about Finally an extremely valuable extension of this Manual can be found in the Video Learning structure you can find inside the Live Page of the Application Maticad Support Team always work on new movies so we encourage you having a look at that section time to time Assumptions and methods In the Manual we will talk about DomuS3D and the Application They refer to the same concept which is the Program you have just purchased and installed The Standalone version is also called SA in this Manual The Client Server version is also called CS in this Manual When talking about DomuS3D or the Application we refe
102. aller rendering times for more information refer to chapter 5 As the Real Time engine lives in a dedicated window you can Keep on working on the project while V Ray RT creates the rendering image Open the RT window on a second monitor so that the customer keeps on looking at the rendering while the designer concentrates on project variations DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 201 Appendix Distributed rendering with V Ray The third release scheduled by May7 2014 contains the V Ray module for Distributed Rendering This module allows you to split the rendering process over multiple computers over the LAN but can be used only through the Render Manager application Refer to Chapter 5 in order to know how to use the distributed rendering A Render Manager Render Manager is the exte rna File Render View Help application that Ma Hy Lp 37 HY DAP Files x86 DomuS3D P lmgjob A p F Eal EA Ea za Q ety za z0 rogram Files x86 Domu egasus Imgjobs can receive the rendering jobs from the DomuS3D and render them in remote The new version of the application can process both V Ray and a mental ray jobs F o0 Moreover it is possible to es process Pegasus as well as Antares rendering jobs and if on the rendering server there is a mail client it is possible to automatically send the rendered image back to the designer by e mail Sala_vista_1 Multi room Floor In
103. amnsnicetaGnd spwneshina EEEE EEREN ERE EERE RE Skins ations 35 HOW TO USE THE CATALOGUES DOWNLOAD MODULE cccccccceeeeessssnncceeeeeeeeeesessssessseneeeeeeeeeeeees 35 eA cg am A AY co er ee eer eee Te eee re eee Teer ee eee eee eee 35 Step 2 3 CONNEC sadsscassaasansicssenaataaauanateneeneatsunsuestantenasSandat nics TEREE EAE EIEEE ENEE REEERE RE ms 36 Step 3 5 open COIGIO QUES sccsncasenasatasencsenadenceedeseuncnuaseudcatedbucdabiecseatetvicusvesvecentatveeu 36 Step 4 5 download catalogues nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneneeaneeeeeeeeeseesessseeeeeeeesssesesessssseses 37 Step 35 5 install catalogues rie nesscieserssctuaressatusurscntunstaseiuiussatuhasniatceassiunceadatcicaasrias 37 Download of single objects ooooooooooooooenoenneenennnenssneseeeseeenseeenessssssssssssssssssssssssssssso 38 PART Zerra 39 OUICK STEP GUIDE icscsssccassssnnnswntcnecsvenseckunnscaenssnscsencosteuauwesssnuunndasnscsevessuevessnvusseoanes 39 WEYA QUICK STEP GUDE loreen ENOR RE ER E NENE 39 Create a new project By using existing room templateS oeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen 39 MOVE WOL S aE E TEA 39 Placing doors and windOWS eeeeeeeesseseseeeseeeeeenenrrerrrerrrerrrrrrrrrerereerereererrerrererererereee 40 Placing objects TAY ONG ways ene veaa seu ee eh esti egy ea ed ea tnd oe gear 40 How to open NAVI GCHON viscandiccsccnsscacasndiseinenoesaehenssnitnesweatecandiaVarwasiainandeccinenbundiaeabins 4 Navigate the scene in 3D With your MOUSE c
104. apter 5 Rendering Reflection Color 25 Reflection Glossiness 80 Reflection Color _ 255 255 255 Reflection Glossiness 80 ra gt 5 255 255 Hilight Glossiness Lock v Hilight Glossiness 1 00 Hilight Glossiness Lock Hilight Glossiness 1 00 m S Reflection Color 255 255 255 Reflection Glossiness 30 aa he nas Reflection Color _ 255 Reflection Glossiness 80 Hilight Glossiness Lock O Hilight Glossiness 0 90 Hilight Glossiness Lock Hilight Glossiness 0 70 BRDF Bidirectional Reflectance Distribution Function type 0 Phong 1 Blinn 2 Ward is a function that describes the way the light will be reflected by the object the material is assigned to It is a way of deciding the algorithm you want to use for highlights and to decide the shape you want them to have on the object Phong model simulates very well indirect illumination With Blinn and Ward the points of specular lighting appear more blurred gt er BRDF type 0 Phong 1 Blinn 2 Ward BRDF type 0 Phong 1 Blinn 2 Ward BRDF type 0 Phong 1 Blinn 2 Ward By modifying Anisotropy it is possible to adjust the highlight dimension and shape circular or elliptical 1 0 0 0 and 1 0 means having isotropic surfaces isotropic same and regular distribution of the reflection while an anisotropic material reflects differently d
105. are in the Navigation window or in Wall window as well Click the right mouse button on the wall you want to refer to and select command Tiles layer You will access the mask where to specify the size of the square you want to add to the wall oo crout 0 0 Rot Tiles layer info O Draw Fixed size 170 Width 3 40 N Columns Finally you will locate the area on the wall as you can see in the next image the insert is the grey square rundd with a red line under the mirror E B Lee En E E En A En E E a aa Lae rr DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 78 Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials Advanced features Tile a countertop Sometimes you need to tile a step a countertop a small wall or whichever 3D object in the scene has a surface You can do that proceeding this way open the Navigation window and move the point of view so that you can seethe amp face you want to tile Open the Tiles section in the components window and search for the tile you want to apply to that surface Click in the Options panel the Floor button as you can see in red square pointed out by letter A In the destination field select Surface as you can see in red square pointed out by letter B Check also the grout size and color before applying the tile Now you are ready to drag the tile over the surface Keep the left mouse button pressed while you are moving the in scene You wi
106. area light penumbra linear linear shadow shadow point light object light penumbra A punctual light generates defined shadows only without An area light generates a shadow with a customizable any penumbra penumbra DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 99 Chapter 5 Rendering If you decide to use IES files Multiplier and spot penumbra are automatically disabled If you want to increase or decrease the IES light intensity you need to enable the check named Custom intensity and change the intensity value by typing the needed Lumen or Candela Soft Shadows area lights if No effect is enabled light is punctual and creates just delimited shadows If you enable a different option light becomes larger and starts creating soft shadows If Visible is checked you will see the light in the rendered scene if it is not you will see just the light effects If the light you re dealing with is a bulb we suggest you to choose the spherical shape by changing Radius and Soft Shadow Quality you can reach the needed result Default value for Soft Shadow Quality is 8 if you increase this value e g 16 or 32 the quality of the shadow will be better even if the engine will take more time in order to complete the process Punctual light Delimited shadow Area light Soft shadow If the light is a Spot Light the area can be rectangular or circular see next images With the former you will specify the height
107. art1 exe in order to start installation procedure When the installation procedure will be complete the first time you open ArredoCAD in DomuS3D you will be asked to register the license type in the registration code if you already purchased the software or contact Dinamica if you want to ask for a 30 days trial code Note prior starting software license registration process you need to connect to the Internet in order to operate How to use the integrated module in DomuS3D Launch the integrated module In order to launch the ArredoCAD integrated module first open or create a project From the Layout window open the TOOLS section of the Ribbon and click the New composition button Select Dinamica generic catalogue ArredoCAD will start operating in a dedicated window called Modular Furniture and let you create your own composition providing that you will find the same layout you already designed in DomuS3D including references to doors and windows that already have been placed in the layout ArredoCAD is already equipped with generic catalogues allowing you to create kitchens bathroom furnishing living rooms bedrooms wardrobes etc Note we suggest you to align the cabinets in the correct position so that you will automatically find them in the right place when importing the furniture in the project DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 175 Chapter 9 Modular Furnishing Module Import modular composition in project Onc
108. aterials correct 90 deg refl parameter is 1 0 deg refl can be 0 8 for metals while for floor and polished materials can step between 0 1 and 0 3 Ambient occlusion For most of the materials correct 90 deg refl parameter is 1 0 deg refl can be 0 8 for metals while for floor and polished materials can step between 0 1 and 0 3 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide Ambient occlusion OFF Ambient occlusion ON Chapter 5 Rendering Here follows a list of related parameters for such effect On enables disables Ambient occlusion Samples number of rays used in order to get such effect If you increase this value you have a much more faded real and non dithered image even if time to render will increase We suggest you to use 16 as this is probably the best compromise between rendering speed and quality Max Distance is the distance radius from which you can start evaluating the shadow all around the object Low values mean a smaller shadow and a quicker rendering Do Details allows you to get better Ambient occlusion effect when applied to objects with small contact surface Shadow Color allows you to setup the intensity of the Ambient occlusion shadow Dark colors mean dark shadows and vice versa Ambient Color is the color of the ambient light used by Ambient occlusion This is a very useful parameter as it allows you to enhance shadow portions if they are not strong enough as well as reduce the intensity of the shadow if
109. atter as you have in real life too Portal multiplier allows you to manage diffuse light intensity referred to portal lights Portal I samples allows you to manage light quality referred to portal light Portal white if enabled portal lights will be emitting white light Filter this parameter allows you to choose between 3 different antialiasing filter typologies to be applied to the image in order to reduce segmentation effects as well as Moire effects Generally speaking this filter allows you to apply a sort of blur where you have strong chromatic variations along curves or diagonal lines 1 default value 1 Box 2 Gauss 3 Mitchell is referred to Box Blur simplest filter hence the quicker while rendering the scene 2 referred to Gaussian Blur is a filter which optimizes the image for a better visualization on video 3 referred to Mitchell Netravali Blur this filter paper printouts optimizes image for a better visualization on Example of Moire effect Referring to Portal lights parameter please remember that once enabled every aperture door window hole can be enabled disabled too So you can decide whether or not all the apertures openings of the scene will emit light or just a few of them In order to decide about their behavior double click on the aperture or right click and select Properties Once inside the properties mask you can enable disable the related control which is called Em
110. available also in other catalogues In this case you will see both You can specify that you want to focus just on a format such as 30x30 30x60 This format is compatible for cm unit measure Always provide the format compatible with the chosen unit measure in the Options window If you type before the word you are asking to select all names descriptions that DO contain such word If you type before the word you are asking to select all names descriptions that DO NOT contain such word As soon as catalogues in the Cloud are updated by the Maticad Catalogues Department the Tiles Components window will let you realize that there is a piece of news for those catalogues This will let you jumping to the catalogue you need to update and immediately start downloading it available only for those who have purchased Catalogues Download Service Layings This section allows you to select the dynamic pattern to apply in the project The patterns are divided depending on the different formats they have inside You will learn later on in this guide how to drag amp drop dynamic patterns in order to apply them to the floor walls or any surface in the project and how to fill them with real tiles DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 31 Initial operations and configurations settings Furnishing Elements This section allows you to see all available 3D Objects also called Furnishing Elements by the application in the application catalogu
111. aviour Photometry faces the issue by taking into account many different aspects among them the psychophysical aspects of eyes and human brains while perceiving light This type of lighting attempts to provide something similar to the perceived reality simulation is based on four values the light flux lighting luminance and light intensity In general you can say that the complexity of the photometric light is much more complex than the previous two mentioned above where the level of details accuracy and realism is higher You can give the light the value you can find within the Preset menu it contains a set of light bulbs commercially easy to find and whose intensity is expressed in Watts On equal Watt power supplied you may notice that different types of light bulbs can generate different lighting effects to substantiate this we can say that on equal Watt power supplied values may vary by using other units such as candles or lumens Photometric Lights Photometric Lights Intensity Preset Intensity Preset Lumen imi 100w Bulb M Lumen tin 100W Halogen Bulb s Candela cd F Use IES file O Candela cd F Use IES file 1746 73 2023 19 Actually there is no match among these three units of measurement as they are not homogeneous Watt is the unit of measurement of power Candle is the unit of measurement of luminous intensity whereas the lumen is the unit of measurement of luminous flux Actually there is no match among
112. be able to select the file for the map Following image shows a material applied on a glass The black flowers will not be transparent while the white area lets the object behave like a glass It is possible to use a coloured refection map in order to simulate multi coloured glasses as you can see in the next image By changing the Refraction Glossiness parameter you can control the transparency opacity 100 means a total refraction without any opacity Lower values allow you to obtain opaque materials typical of frosted glass see next images DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 108 Chapter 5 Rendering Glossiness Quality allows you to reduce the noise generated by the opacity Low values mean less defined glossiness Suggested value for most of materials is 16 even if the Application default is 8 as a compromise between good quality and quick rendering processes If you increase Glossiness Quality in fact rendering process takes longer time DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 109 Chapter 5 Rendering Every material in real life has a proper Index of refraction IOR which describes the way light bends when crossing the material surface This index gets higher if material density is higher A value of 1 0 means that light will not change direction air s JOR is little more than 1 water is about 1 33 glasses usually are in between 1 40 and 1 70 depending on their dispersion quantity Following images l
113. been set to 0 7 Day time and Night time pre set buttons automatically setup parameters value in order to obtain a nice rendering in night time without any natural light and daylight with active sun and sky DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 97 Chapter 5 Rendering Artificial lights V Ray uses photometric light Lights can be placed in the scene by clicking the right mouse button wherever in the layout window and selecting the command New light In this way you can choose among 3 different types of light bulb spot neon Moreover there are objects in the components library that already integrate a light inside them The typology name to search for is Furniture Spot lighting in Maticad manufacturer They are not available in the standard installation DVD but you can download them inside the Live page even if you have not processed the optional download service They are modern and classic lights containing photometric spots and neon With such objects you just need to drag and drop them in the scene without taking care of the light setup Let s try working with lights open create a project place a light and open its properties section double click the light over the image or one of the lines or click the right mouse button and choose the command Properties Advanced button allows you to open a detailed section where to find all parameters involved in the rendering process Let s have a look at them Photom
114. but their contents are not used DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 164 Chapter 8 TouchFly Chapter 8 TouchFly module TouchFly available in Ultimate version i TouchFly is an optional module hence you could not have it available in your version You can FE Sues gt M check if it is available by selecting the command TouchFly Editor available in the Home section Touchy S Touchy Catalogue group of the Ribbon If the editor opens this means that you already purchased the module If it does not you need to purchase it as an additional module for your Application you can do it at any time as for any additional module Contact Maticad in order to be given prices and conditions and remember that you can try TouchFly for a limited time before deciding ask your sales representative for this option Catalogue What can I do with TouchFly Complete extend the Application libraries You can extend the catalogues you regularly downloaded in the Live page adding images such as the photographs of the collections available in the catalogue PDF files the catalogues of the collections pricelists technical sheets etc and 360 Panoramas Especially PDF and images can really complete your catalogue in order to have available all information you need while in the sales as well as in the installation process We will call those catalogues you have customized adding your own information extended catalogues in order to distinguish the
115. button hence this is a very useful mode when moving in very complex projects without having powerful computers DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 27 Initial operations and configurations settings Transparency allows you seeing the transparent materials in the navigation window Glasses windows shower boxes bottles This option forces the computer using more hardware resources hence it could make the 3D window a bit slower Predefined views animation will let the application moving smoothly between the saved points of view those predefined available in the Ribbon but also the ones you will save by yourself in the scene This effect allows you simulating a path you walk in when you are moving in the scene together with your customer with a higher impact effect Reflections allows you to enable reflective effects if available materials are in the scene The reflection effect is nothing more than a simulation and is not accurate as the one you will see in the render of the scene This option forces the computer using more hardware resources hence it could make the 3D window a bit slower O Rendering In this section you can decide whether to use Advanced graphic engines like mental ray or V Ray rather than using the navigation quality for getting the scenes images Please notice that mental ray and V Ray options may be disabled in case you have not purchased a license containing those professional rendering engines For deeper in
116. c and dynamic so their format will automatically adjust depending on the tiles format you re going to choose Now get to the TILES section of the Components window search the tiles you want by browsing collections manufacturers and or formats alternatively if you already know the name or the code keep on using the Search field in order to quicker find it Live xX Planimetria Bagno Tutorial cop X ga Componenti LS wie z E Nessuni feisat a C IPASE z propurto gt MATICAD z 5 z q I I TE z A r z a rE MCO 016 a 3 z L O a Z FH E PENNE ICO 918 3 TT 3 TI 75 a int a 2 0 5 MCO 019 E zZ Opzioni i 2 A Fuge 00 E Rotazone 00 Altezza Fascia juve gt Destinazione Superficie fo a W Allinea Sinistre f Enable Change similar tiles mode then drag the tile image and drop it on one of the scheme slots Release left mouse button in order to drop the tile DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 183 The Sample Project g Do the same also for the missing tiles second and third being careful of dropping the tile on the remaining missing colours slots In the Sample Project we have applied the same tile to the 3 slots in order to take advantage of random repetition but you can select different tiles and different formats with this scheme while other schemes may force you to select compatible formats h
117. cccccccccsseccceeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 4 Tile the floor With a single tile solid PAtteTN ccccccsscssssssesssssseesseseecseseteaaeaeees 42 Tile all walls with a single tile solid pattern Strip Dy Strip ccccccccccccccccccsccceceeeeeees 42 Launch the rendering process iciniicssinssdusitunsiucasandinecnasiinacnnsdunilnesdcabaambinisneniunaeaanbicn 43 The Sample Project ooooeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeseeeerrrrrrrrrrererrereressserererreererereeereererrerereeereeeee 44 PART Jei AAAA EAOa 45 CHAPTER 12 LAY OUT Dunnan 45 KREATION E E E E E E E 45 By using existing templates disitias iat dnd aMunishnalahaaninicaniahGavial 45 Rectangular ROOM cricsssivcssissdiersssadnsnsdnestassanediansdacddaniaadendsdaed docnuaidensabasadcnsnansecdeaanaens 45 Free hand IW sascha tndtaeeae agit ashtiats aheisealeicsakeadasith li daucbabacldainhalabbicidutahancusias 45 By using CAD 2D tools in empty project occccccccccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 46 Save room in LOMPONCIUS nsiassarcusnis sana aie etine ease anal 47 HOWTO MOVE penine aeea AEAEE EERE AEAEE EA NAAA AAA ERAEN 48 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide With JOUr MOUSES i Sete ise eee EEA Ren Se aaa Ri cP AER eet Sa a cent a eee Sa een Xe 48 M O REV DORIC a a a a e ea a eaa aai 48 MODIFICATION aer anA E EA A E ATA 49 MOVE WAE e AEE T at E ah etal all 49 Walls heiehtrand widths eiei eE E EE EEE RE E E E 49 COS Tea E A E 49 HOLES N NOS EESE se cul T ET E E EEN 50 SOPIN TOO Se AEE E
118. changes in fact to Update Updating coronene r preview is quite immediate so it is very useful to use such method in order to change values available in the Exposure control section and see how they affect the rendering of the scene You can choose among 3 different preview resolutions as you can see in this image Here s a list of the parameters you can work with together with their explanation Feiret Bosraten 6 4 Exposure value in the photography exposure adjustment is aimed at obtaining an accurate representation neither too light overexposed nor too dark underexposed The adjustment takes place on three interacting parameters such as the aperture the time during which the camera shutter remains open to allow light to reach the film or the sensor and finally the ISO sensitivity of the film A proper calibration of these interrelated parameters lets the scene have an adequate representation The value the rendering engine provides the user represents the synthesis of these three parameters It is therefore the most important instrument to calibrate the image quality to be generated in a simple and effective 12030 way By clicking on the numeric field some arrows will appear enabling you to increase or decrease the numeric value contained therein At any induced variation the preview image is updated in real time thus making easier to find the best You can also type the numeric value in the field and in this wa
119. check symbol Living job relates to rendering jobs that have correctly been completed If you double click over it you will open the folder containing the rendered image The gray gear symbol RenderKitchen job relates to the job currently being processed In the next page we will learn how to setup a rendering job session DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 141 Chapter 5 Rendering Before starting the rendering job it is important to setup R M options Click the Options button which is pointed out in this image View Help Pirae You will access the R M Options mask Distributed Rendering V Ray AsusLap PC lap_asus3d MacBookProLap Render on local host Log Send E Mail Address Notification only Notification and rendered image E Mail Server mail maticad it The CPU Cores section allows you to decide whether or not using all the power of the computer If R M is running on a Rendering Server you may like it to use all cores but if you are using R M on the same computer where DomuS3D and other applications are maybe it is better to leave at least 2 CPU for other purposes The rendering process in fact is very intensive and tends to use as many cores as possible In case you have purchased V Ray you can use the distributed rendering option in order to speed up the rendering process also by using multiple computers This is what the section mark
120. cific customer name or project description this opprtuinty is very useful when you have hundreds of projects and you need to quickly access one of them We encourage you using search fields in order to speed up your selection process The Options Button at the bottom of the projects thumbnails allows you to decide the way you want to Custome list the projects in this window it is not so important to customze this section of the panel as the search field usually gives you so much flexibility in pointing out the project you want to work with This section of the Components window lists project Templates you can use while planning If you don t have any opened project by double clicking one of the templates allows you to create a new project using such template That s a very useful and quick way for example in order to create square rooms and you will be able to modify rooms size later on in the layout window or to create similar projects for the same or different customers using the same room and avoiding designing it from scratch again If you double click a template while you already have an opened project you ll be able to add this room to the existing one this is one of the options you can use in order to create multi rooms environments Remember that if you select a room and click the CANC button of the keyboard you will delete that template from the collection And now your last question is H
121. ck OK a Job for Render Manager application or a 360 Panorama Leave the Exposure control to Automatic and click Generate Preview Application will start calculating optimized parameters and will give you a preview Exposure Control Preview resolution In order to create an automatic setup the Application needs to try some samples and calculate the illumination for this reason you will need to wait some time depending on the complexity of the project and the power of your computer it is the similar approach used by digital cameras when you set the automatic exposure The Sample Project Now that you have seen the most relevant steps to follow up in order to create your first project and if you still don t have time to read the following chapters you could jump to Part 4 where you ll find a step by step process to follow up in order to create a standard medium complexity project DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 44 Chapter 1 Layout Part 3 Chapter 1 Layout Creation By using existing templates If you need to create a project and you already have a similar layout shape available in the room templates you can use it and create a project in just 1 click Why do we say a similar layout Because if you need let s say a rectangular room you can use the square template and modify the room size very easily right after So don t be afraid if the templates dimensions are not the ones you really
122. click the Tab Keyboard button in order to switch between one and the other Click it as many times you want and remember not to move the mouse while tabbing or typing the measure distance so that you ll keep on focusing on the wall object you formerly pointed to This button allows you to enable disable the desktop grid When the grid is enabled the mouse will be snapped to the grid depending on the grid size that can be customized in the Options Preferences of the program this is useful in order to quickly draw move if the grid step is compatible with the needed dimension When grid is disabled the mouse can move everywhere in the desktop very flexible but be careful as it will be very difficult to reach the needed dimension unless you will use the typing fields If you want to disable the grid click s even while drawing or moving objects click it again in order to enable the grid again When you draw rooms or CAD 2D entities it allows you to enable disable the orthogonal mood You can click it even while drawing Allows you to Zoom In Out the desktop When dragging an object along the desktop allows you to change the dragging point You will switch as many corners of the shape you are dragging as many times you click the P button DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 52 Chapter 1 Layout Available snaps in Layout In the following table you can find available snaps together with their graphic reference and description The snaps
123. click the cursor over it and select command Move always have a look at the title of the context menu you get each time you right click the mouse button as it reveals the object entity the Application is referring to if you don t find the command you are searching for probably you have right clicked over the wrong object So close the context menu by clicking outside it and try again on the correct entity selecting one of its construction lines When you enter the Corner move mood you can drag amp drop that corner somewhere else As usual you can use the left mouse button for the new position or you can be more accurate by typing the distance from the first position in the dedicated fields and click Keyboard button When moving the corner you can press the o keyboard button in order to enable the orthogonal mode being sure to move the corner just horizontally or vertically Splitting existing walls It can be useful to divide existing walls of the project sometimes you need to really create more walls and modify the shape of the room sometimes you need to split the walls just in order to easily tile them in different ways Move the cursor on the internal side of the wall you want to divide then right click the cursor over it and select command Split you can also select the button Split available in the Layout section of the Ribbon in the Inside Walls group Now the Application asks you to define where to split the wall as usual y
124. command TouchFly Editor available in the Catalogue group eServices You will open the Editor page that allows you to control the libraries you have already installed Section A CORRE as of the editor allows you to specify the manufacturer and or collection you want to assign the extended information for If you specify the Manufacturer only the information will be seen everywhere in the catalogue If you specify Manufacturer Collection the information will be located in that collection only As you can see in section A you have 4 different levels for tiles down to the single item in case you select an item the extended information will be see just when you open that item Section B allows you to decide which kind of information you want to add to the extended catalogue you can add images PDF files and 360 Panoramas Those information will be see both on iPAD and PC visualizer Videos and links will be available just on the PC visualizer Once you select the extended information type in section B you can start importing the new files section C allows you to browse for the new file locate and import it in the Application database Section D allows you to provide a preview image for that information D is not mandatory and if missing the visualizer will use a default preview image TouchFly uE Puririy clones of feos O Gatended information Value eeliqned to the cone fem Manudactarer Image gallery a w Links Vicker Prev
125. csccscscessseseseseseseeeees 70 Deletethe floor coverin Ss isa sess sar hla a TT 71 Changeall floor TH OS sees tetas Se ghee ean Si EE EEEE Sea See cee eee 71 CHANGE SOME tiles only uneori a dee sdusal Milan a a e a aS 71 COVER THE WALLS irae EATE E sue sntans seuncuacveesaaatnspeeedivaw aud tinned cautud iene deat 72 Tile all walls with a single tile solid pattern strip Dy Strip ccccccccccccccccccccssceeeeeees 72 Roll b ck the last Stipriaan E EN E EE ER 73 Change strips height manually eeeseeeeeseseeeseesesenenrerrerererrrrrerrrrereeeseeeeeerrereereereeeee 73 Change strips height with tiles number ccccccccccccccsscceseeceeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesaaaaaaaaas 73 S ve dynamic pane Da ee ORT Oe oe EAE EA A Menor E EA EEE E E A en 73 Move Strips UP AOWN Sis es Sect EAA rs Cet Ss Sela ars Sette Sas Cece SLR E LR 74 Single wall with a single tile solid pattern cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeessseseessesseseenees 75 Change strip origin and QNLONINCNE srccesseiecdeGociscccasbieecadaceticeasudecanda casecenaauclea sees 76 Usine dynamic paterns n ree a a E EEEE ES 76 TILE SHOW CLD ONC OTOI ows ete E EEE O TO E A ENE 76 VLA AAAA NANTA AEAEE E EEO O E E EAE EE 77 Tiled SEIT EE E T T E A E ET 78 ADVANCED FEATURES aiii aI A AAN E AA E 79 Tile a countertop irrien E e E E E E E E E Ri E EE T E antes 79 Change the existing grout COLOUT eeeeeesesseeseeseseeeesererererrrrerrrrrreererrrerererererreeeereeeee 79 Rotate CAI STATS ANE iinn a E
126. cts too as you will later on in this guide You will now learn how to create a new room starting from an empty project but it is evident that you can use these tools any time in your project in order to create more rooms or 3D Objects First of all close the existing project if any and get back to the LivePage In the Home tab of the Ribbon select command Empty project As always the Application will ask you the generic information about the project After filling in the project details you will get to the desktop of course it will be empty and the Application will now wait for you Before starting always remember that in order to create a room you have to create a closed shape That s why when we learned about the free hand drawing we started and closed the layout in the same point So let s start Open the Ribbon tab dedicated to CAD 2D tools Here you have available several entities in order to draw a layout Line as you enter the command you can set the first point with the left mouse button or typing point coordinates keyboard button for the second one you can use the mouse again or typing the length of the line and the angle you want to have between the line and the X axis The Application still remains in the line draw mood so that you can draw a second line starting from the final point of the former one If you want to stop drawing lines press keyboard button or right click and select menu Cancel If you want to
127. de 82 Chapter 5 Rendering Rendering by using V Ray Launch the rendering process If you want to start the rendering process open the navigation window move the point of view in the needed rs PEJ position and select the command Full image available in the Navigation section of the Ribbon Full Partial Dynamic image fimage image tendering Even if V Ray can find an automatic setup of the scene exposure sometimes it may be necessary to try some small size samples before launching the final process For sample image we suggest not to use a high resolution and quality setup as you could face long time rendering If you have a look at the section named Image Quality you see that there are 3 Image Quality different quality levels Low Medium High The greater quality you ask the Default options Application the longer it will take to render the image so at the beginning if you eae eae one are not sure about illumination and materials setup it is better to try some Medium Quality High Quali samples using medium or low quality Illumination and exposure can be automatically adjusted by the Application click the button Automatic For Printing Customized Customized Multiplier Pixel Resolution xi v v 1515x852 1515 x Image Quality Default options Exposure control Options Save Show advanced options Automatically shut down the PC when done TalkImage Size Create job Panorama You
128. do point this choice will let you delete the last corner so that you can fix it again Drawing corners with the left mouse button is a very quick way to draw corners thanks to the snap to the grid of the desktop but sometimes it is not as accurate as you need For this reason if the walls of the rooms are orthogonal all horizontal and vertical you can use a trick in order to get as fast as accurate once specified the first corner thanks to the left mouse button as any point you choose for the first corner is correct press the o keyboard button to switch to orthogonal mode Once you click the o button you can see that despite the position of the mouse the wall you re going to draw will always be vertical or horizontal In this mode you can specify the direction you want to the wall to be designed into and start typing the length of the wall consider the unit measure you currently have selected which is visible at the right bottom corner of the status bar of the application Click the button when the you finish typing and you will see that the wall is there in the layout Proceed by moving the mouse in a different direction then type again to confirm For the last wall you can still click the first corner of the room with the left mouse button or even right click with the mouse and select Close By using CAD 2D tools in empty project With the CAD 2D tools you can create more complex shapes and use them to create new rooms and obje
129. e The visualization options and search criteria are very similar to the ones already specified for the tiles component apart for the format By double clicking an element thumbnail you access the window that allows you to view modify the item properties in that window the Modify button allows you to change the default materials for the object s layers You will learn later on in the guide how to create import new objects on your own As soon as Catalogues in the Cloud are updated by the Maticad Catalogues Department the Tiles Components window will let you realize that there is a piece of news for those catalogues This will let you jumping to the catalogue you need to update and immediately start downloading it available only for those who have purchased Catalogues Download Service This section contains all materials textures that can be assigned to 3D Objects within the project By double clicking the material thumbnail you open the window that allows you to edit the material properties and effects You will learn later on in the guide how to drag amp drop materials over the objects layer you want to assign them to Materials selection may vary depending on the rendering engine you have chosen to work with Mental ray and V Ray materials in fact may differ each other hence it is possible that material collections for them are not identical You will learn later on in the guide how to create new materials on your own T
130. e O cosd i Backgrounds are dds files stored in the DomuS3D Bitmap Backgrounds folder and you can add your own backgrounds by copying dds png or jpg files in such folder or by selecting a new working folder for backgrounds using the button highlighted in this image In case you use jpg or png format you will not be able to rotate the background and it will be fixed in the scene Advanced effects in Navigation window The Navigation window available starting from Pegasus version allows you to improve the graphic quality if your PC is equipped with powerful graphic card Close the Navigation window if open and open the Application Properties mask by selecting the command FILE Options As you see in the next image try to enable all effects in the navigation open the advanced section and check the sun light control DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 57 Chapter 2 Navigation Planar reflections E Spot lights V Mirrors Sun light V Covered floors a E Electric bulbs E Covered walls M Interactive elements V Antialiasi Maps resolution Wireframe navigation V Predefined Views Animation Ambient Occlusion E Show external walls 1024 w Panorama image size Open again the Navigation window and check the difference You should now see more detailed materials and tiles finishes and the graphic quality of the scene should be better On the contrary navigation
131. e colour assigned automatically by the program and calculated on an average of the colour of the real tile This mode can be useful in the case of projects with large tiled surfaces eg Shopping centres airports etc where a simplified rendering of the tiles speeds up and makes elaboration easier especially in a real time graphic representation also called virtual navigation O Display show elements in Modify Tiling Shows hides 3D objects against the wall when you are viewing that wall in a 2D window O Advanced items selection Offers the user a more direct and detailed choice in the search for tiles in the database specifying various fields like series manufacturer size code etc Consequently a different selection interface is used dedicated to more experienced users O Load save project on file The program usually stores all projects within the internal database this means that the user does not need to take care of the project file location on the disk as the Application will manage the projects file system You have indeed the opportunity of changing this way of working being you to decide where to save the project file enabling this choice you will work the same way you do with programs like Excel Word and many others where you load and save files where you DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 24 Initial operations and configurations settings want In this configuration a double click on a project file its extensio
132. e one Of course you will need to use both left and right button the left one will set the direction while the right one will really let the observer walking in the scene Gamers are used to move with the mouse in addition with the keyboard buttons especially Ww Al S D With your keyboard The same movements you ve seen in the previous paragraph can be achieved by using the keyboard buttons There are predefined buttons that allow you to navigate the scene and you can customize them as you prefer If you click Configuration button in the Ribbon Navigation group you open a mask where of View view D to see the current setup change it as you need and even adjust the mouse rotation and speed The current setup is the standard one in PC gaming In the next image you can see the Navigation customization mask Mouse Forward backward TEEN ift right Rotateleft otate left right LEFT BUTTON Rotate rigt lookup otate up down ook down Foe nma Move down NUM 20 0 Movement steps 10 0 Rotation degrees DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 55 Chapter 2 Navigation Note that you can use both keyboard and mouse movements in order to walk quicker in the room why don t you try to keep the left mouse button pressed in order to set direction and w keep it pressed too and release when reaching destination keyboard button in order to go forward With your SpaceNavigator Space Navigator is a 3D joystick made by 3DConn
133. e KOE EEN REEE DEEN EEE DEE eee renee 11 HOW TOUSE THIS MANUA sornopoor aveesea nananana sni NERA EEEa EEP AENEAN r VANE nn aineas 12 ASSUMPTIONS AND METHODS ssssseseseseseeeeetesestststretetetetetetetetstststststststseetetstatstststsesesesesesesesesent 12 Dras BIT Oa ae E E E E E E E os iuaats uat 12 THE SAMPLE PROC T aeien aE AAE EEN A NO 13 PAR T Lerun a 14 INERODUC MON usna 14 WHAT S NEW IN DOMUS3D PEGASUS scessssesessesescesesseseeceseseeseseesaeseseseesesecaeecseeeeseeseseeaeeesaeees 14 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 22cicu scsssieveedescavaavieoveedccaussiuoeadvendeccei atedteciaceunationde 15 TST ADA TION PROCEDURE 6 t5scactincne sols casei ene AR PEAN ERARON ENEE REAA EERE OERA 16 POV ATG AAG UAGE S riisi on nn o N AN EN AN ENER 18 INITIAL OPERATIONS AND CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ccccsssssssceeees 19 UP TO DATE IMAGES AND CHAPTERS IN THIS MANUAL ccccccecseesessssnneceeeeeeeeeeeeesseesssaneeeeeseeeeeees 20 STARTING THE PROGRA Morrer pede ceed sop catia E SNPE NENE 20 LNE PAGE aces tsb cng EOE EEA EEN 20 DRM E DI EATEN E A EE A AA E A EEE A 21 DEPAUET O HOR TOUT nae REEE EE E REEERE EEEE A EER eee ae 22 PROPERTIES PANEL eir K NEN O ENNAN EVETT OP 24 COMPONENTS WINDOW A 30 CATALOGUES DOWNLOAD wissascescscasectsccannetateanensccdaneesstvausnteiiontetestanesbecianetitvcaseen 34 THE CATALOGUES DOWNLOAD SERVICE gescix secjotereerzecterercseeni dwar 35 TERMS OF USE ccnsuvsectuusoindnnndishinisiunsnioeedatinesi
134. e exact dimensions 50x160 centimetres Then press Enter keyboard button Rectangle 160 c You can convert a CAD 2D shape into an object by clicking the right mouse button over it on the line and selecting command Create object Specify following details d Point the washbasin you want to choose by searching in the Search field of FURNISHING ELEMENT s Components window the text recessed or even self drilling Those items will automatically create the hole in the countertop e Drag the washbasin and drop it over the countertop Before releasing indeed remember to click the i keyboard button in order set the correct elevation of the washbasin from the floor by pointing the countertop f Go back to the Navigation window in order to see if everything is fine It may be possible that you still do not see the washbasin in this case you can ask the Application to update the view by clicking i the Update view button in the Ribbon view g If something s wrong it is possible that the washbasin s elevation is not correct or the washbasin you have chosen is not a self frilling one h In order to add the second washbasin click the right mouse button over the existing washbasin and select command Copy Locate the second one in the correct position Note don t worry about the elevation of the second one As you copied the first one elevation has been inherited with the co
135. e full scene while remaining inside the room A first option you have is to hide the wall so that you can remain outside the room and render it from there open the Options window see Paragraph titled Properties panel in Initial operations and configurations settings get to the Navigation and Rendering section and disable Show external walls control As you find the correct point of view save it by clicking F3 keyboard button or My Views command in Navigation section of the Ribbon click Save current 10 Unfortunately the solution we gave you in point n 9 does not work in our project doors and windows in fact still remain in the rendered scene And also you cannot hide them the way you already saw for the shower box as doors and windows are special objects So in this case we ll use the following trick save the project and JUST FOR THE TIME OF RENDERING THE SCENE move the wall containing the door towards the bottom In this way the room will be longer than in real life This is just a trick you will use in order to be able to render the scene the best way Once launched the rendering job you ll exit the project without saving it In order to extend the room click the right mouse button over the internal wall and select command Move Extend the room as you can see in the following image the camera icon allows you to see where the point of view has been placed a a 3 3 3 a a a 2 g g a DomuS3D Pegasus U
136. e it in the library if you have already placed all the items in the layout of the project From the layout window select the command File gt Database gt Furnishing elements gt New Select items group as you can see in the next image M to erms FILE HOME LAYOUT CAD VIRTUAL NAVIGATION TOOLS M New gt File b Modify gt H Open Ctrl O Draw gt Insert gt n TEE B Virtual t x Save project Ctri S e H View gt Renderi gt Zz Saveas Ctrl Shift S sande LMA Database b Details K Close Ctrl F4 Tools Tables Live b Internal price list B 3 L Window gt Supplier price list me 1 Live Models ii Attachments v 2Layout Maximus Tiles a Properties Ctrl D 3 Virtual navigation Formats Ll i gt Panels Bees r Share Ctrl H Carpets Pet i Furnishing elements gt New gt Print b Materials gt TQ Show Tile Materials gt TE Modify fad Import Export gt Photo2D gt T3 Delete b c R External documents gt Wg Copy Labor materials gt S Export 327 Send Mosaics gt 15 Import amp Manufacturers Maru Z amp Print PE S Catalogue gt Import DXF elements 3s Options IdentiTile p peee i You will be asked to select the items you want to group using the left mouse button Confirm and stop selection by using the right mouse button and finally provide item information Now go to the Components window
137. e to plan daily or weekly backups and statistics will be available checking designers efficiency and productivity Purpose This Manual was written to e Teach new DomuS3D users about the process of setting up a project architecture fill it with 3D Objects tile floors walls and objects New users will also learn all aspects related to rendering the scene in the best and most effective way in order to be more successful while in the marketing side In the technical side users will be guided through project estimate and blueprints so that the installer will be able to understand how the job has to be done Finally knowing how to manage the internal catalogues database is crucial in order to have available the items needed while designing and planning right when you need them e Teach those who already are customers from the previous versions about the new features available in the latest version Pegasus the manual will give them the opportunity of concentrating just on the pieces of news e Give experienced DomuS3D users some advanced information in order to keep on improving their knowledge on the software Even if you are an advanced user there s always something more and new to know and here we are to share with you all details about the application The first release of the manual planned for February 2014 may not include the advanced section as this has been planned for the second release April 2014 For this reason we enco
138. e you ll move the 70 0 TEE YY Ymyyyyww 0 UV door too it is the red rectangle linked to the mouse cursor wi eie wins came saw You cannot leave the door in the middle of the room so try ies placing the mouse cursor over the internal walls of the project you ll notice that the door automatically rotates and aligns to the wall and becomes green this is the confirmation that you can now locate it Now that the door knows the destination wall it becomes green and a double measure control shows up giving you the distance between the door and the left right corner of the wall In order to definitively release the door you can click again the left button if the position is correct but if you want to be even more accurate leave the mouse where it is in order to specify the destination wall and start typing the distance you want to refer to In the image above you can see that the selected distance to refer to is the one between the door and the left corner In case you want to refer to the right one click the TAB keyboard button to switch to the right distance and type again that distance If you want to place a window go back to the components section search windows by browsing typologies or by writing window in the search field then follow up the same steps as before as windows have the same behavior as doors Note that doors and windows can be dragged only on the internal side of the wall They can be dropped only when you start seei
139. e you have completed the composition in the ArredoCAD environment you can import it in the DomuS3D project by clicking the button Insert composition available in the Ribbon You will automatically switch to the layout window where you will see the group of cabinets in the same location you placed them in Change the composition You cannot modify the composition while in the Layout or Navigation window If you want to change back the composition you need to reopen it in the integrated module You can do that by clicking the right mouse button on the composition and select command Open This procedure will not work if you share the project package on a DomuS3D that s not equipped with the same integration Training contacts and support Learning how to use Arredocad You can learn how to use the integrated modular furnishing module connecting to the following page http www arredocad com arredocad videos There you will find useful videos that will allow you composing your first kitchen using the generic catalogue Company details ArredoCAD is produced by Dinamica S r l located in Via degli Olmi 16 4 61122 Pesaro PU Italy Web site www dinamicasoft com Registered mail dinamicasoftware pec it Support We remind you that the integrated module by Dinamica is not technically supported by Maticad For this reason you need to contact Dinamica itself using following references Telephone English and Italian languages
140. ecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 202 Render MAN OCT 4 cts ciatiicliacttanstsntc sais Mest ed bie Maatiises sims nudundbanbimddanasinedantiamedant 202 MUT OOS chara hes ease secs EEE EEES 202 Technical blueprint S oss lia cauaccnnihs auscuctanciandameanctanuien e a a a e 203 Windowson horizontal COLI Picssr E a EE E E a ai 203 CHAO TE Seea AE AEE A A amenonetumenemetent 203 Components WIN GOW risiini ei iaeia e aE E E E A A were A is 204 Import TilePlanner projects cosuscasnscis ciuanionsasuscusciuansducsshe dus catasiietdaecanchuucteatiahesachuns 204 Modular furnishing module cisccccssssicsseis csc susawtieasssacecssbawsecsesaaccenea tics sasdssccassarseesees 205 CONTACTS preira e EEE Sula duabisbua Sak E ORE E EE obabtivsy EESE a eak E 206 SUpport Leani ar EE EE E E AE EE E R E ES 206 Catalogues Department eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrrererererererrerererererrrererereee 206 Marketing Department ooooeeeeneeneeeseeeeesesssssssssesseeeseeeseneensssssssssssssssssssssssssssssse 206 Acc unt Mand GOT orsiiosieeioniseas iaie ani aea a aE EEE aE AE a aa EEE EEEE E 206 Suggestions and improvements Wish LiSt ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeesseseseeessesssesseesseeeeees 207 EPILOG Bi ane eerie Wa eee ar met nee ner angen OT ee OLR a eo E arene nae LE 208 INDE X aaeoa deana nae aeo a occu de abede Cans eane N oara 209 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 10 About this manual The Reference
141. eceive information about the use of the program you can select it with your mouse and copy it Ctrl C Buy an upgrade you can access the Maticad Store where to buy an additional module among those available for your program or the license upgrade in case you are using a trial version you can also buy the full application Apply update updates are the application by using a v2c file Vendor to Customer received from MATICAD usually after the purchase of a functional extension Collect info this button allows you to generate a c2v file Customer to Vendor containing all the information found in your hardware key thus your licence Such file can be sent to MATICAD by email for any key verification renewal or upgrade DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 28 Initial operations and configurations settings System Variables General Measures Layout Navigation and Rendering Hardware key System Variables Events System Variables poss Value ActToolBar ATTENTION AutoDetachDbOnExit Modifications to environment variables sere could make the system instable Please CD Drive don t change entities that you don t CounterData know CSMode CSServerPath DAEMatUsePrefix DB OPEN MODE Locate application on disk This section allows you to modify the application variables stored in Windows Registry system As these are fundamental settings for the operation of the program it is strongly recommended to make any mod
142. ecognize them DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 60 Chapter 3 Elements Placing objects in layout Placing a 3D object in the project layout is as easy as placing a door These are the steps to follow in order to add an object to the project 6 Search the object in the components window 7 When you see it click the left mouse button on the object image keep the mouse pressed 8 Move the mouse over the layout and release the mouse button 9 Move the object to the place you want to drop it 10 Click the left mouse button in order to drop it As already seen with doors the object will automatically rotate and align itself to the wall as soon as you move the mouse over the internal side of a E F a jj Yj wall Ga i V1 When aligned to the wall the double measure system will appear in order 1200 o l to let you see the distance between the object and the left right corner of the wall it is aligned to You can click the left mouse button in order to definitively place it in the position where the mouse is or you can start typing the exact measure using the left right distance you can switch between the two by clicking the keyboard button While dragging the object in the layout you can use the keyboard buttons in order to rotate the object by 45 for anticlockwise for clockwise While dragging the object in the layout you can use the R keyboard button in order to rotate the object by an angle
143. ect DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 125 Azimuth 180 180 this value has to be where the sun is referring to the horizontal the mouse over the yellow circle keep the Cursor movement changes at the same 180 Photons 1 000 1 000 000 this value tells 180 called photons will be emitted by the sun bounces between objects you will find inside this effect makes the image more realistic This is indeed also the effect we 90 90 Chapter 5 Rendering provided in degrees and tells the application line You can modify this value by Left clicking mouse pressed and move it in the new position time Azimuth and Elevation the application how many light particles so The higher number for them the more light the room the higher will be the rendering time considering the sun illumination in real life suggest you to enhance increasing photons number in case you have dark sections in your image cause of arches niches objects corners which hide the other light sources you have in the project J ALL This sequence shows you how photons affect the final rendering from left to right you can see that increasing photons you discard the ugly dark shadowed corners and even if the shadow will still remain in the image right the way objects create shadows is more realistic fluid and gradual Sky When it s been enabled you will see a blue area in section in the sky provided that
144. ect estimate to external systems The basic export option is the Excel format While you re in the Estimate window open the ESTIMATE section of the Ribbon and click the Export WM ia Sonan button You can see 3 different choices ES RA Delete The first one allows you to create an Excel file with the same content of the estimate you see in Initialize Recalculate New HOME ESTIMATE DATABASE the Application see image below eT The second and third options allow you to send the estimate to the Account Software Note 1 59 Ean these options run only if DomuS3D has formerly been connected to the Account software This connection procedure cannot be done independently by the user and needs Maticad to work together with your Account software provider Contact Maticad in order to receive further information on this kind of integration H 9 A7 cancellami xls Compatibility Mode Excel HOME INSERT PAGE LAYOUT FORMULAS DATA REVIEW VIEW TEAM De Pa ee m a ik db Cut Arial 10 2 Y Wrap Tet General v P By Normal Bad Neutral D a Bie Ee Good HS Copy iti r Paste B I E Merge amp Center E g 9 g 20 Conditional Format as Check Cell Explanatory Linked Cell Format Painter Formatting Table Clipboard E x Alignment F Number E Styles v A B D E F G H J cod_articolo formato var_colore codice_produttore codice categori descrizione fornitore unita_misura n
145. ed by Distributed Rendering V Ray refers to here you can enable this option you have to install the distributed rendering applications on the computers you want to use prior using them in the R M add new computers to the rendering network both providing their PC name or the IP the computer has in the LAN or remove existing ones You can use up to 10 computers for distributed rendering The Log section allows you to specify the e mail address that will receive a notification and the rendered image as well if you want as soon as a rendering job has been completed The email server field will be filled in with the reference of the mail server available in the Company s LAN Email server has to allow sending email without user profiling for the LAN use only moreover you have to install an e mail Client in the computer where Render Manager is running associated to the user profile that you re using in order to run Render Manager Use this button if you have added new jobs to the queue and you want to refresh the list in section A of the R M el Use this button in order to start the rendering process if there are rendering jobs available in section A Use these buttons in order to pause or stop a rendering Pause allows you to operate on the computer in case D you need to do something urgent Play will start again the same rendering from where it was paused right before Stop will definitively cancel the render process
146. eew Preview file Nameg Cakahogae Me q fefoul tatasheel png Datasheet Lisine DomutiD Pegasus ITA pd LE Marmo canara lastra 60x150 Inherited values Proeew eames fir Name Cake pt fol If you want to see the result of the extended information directly in DomuS3D you can open the integrated visualizer Select TouchFly command very near the Editor command you formerly selected Browse down to the collection item you specified and you will see the image gallery and or PDF you recently added In the next image you can see the image gallery Double click a preview in order to see the image full screen live x Electronic catalogue editer X ect cal a TILES MATICAD MARMI 47 24x23 62 Marmo carrara lastra 60x120 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 166 Chapter 8 TouchFly Extended 360 Panoramas In the B section of the Editor select the group called 3D Panorama In the C section select the folder where you saved the 360 Panorama use D section if you want to assign a small image preview to that panorama Once the Panorama has been imported you ll see it available in the panoramas list You can use this button if you want to immediately share this panorama through DomuS3D Box App see also Chapter 6 Share section You can use this button if you want to add item details images to specific items available in the panorama You will then access a mask where you can rotate the scene in order to focus on the item you wan
147. eld is the customer name we suggest you to write something with sense here in order to better identify the project later on Click OK 2 We will design the room in free hand mode a Click the left mouse button everywhere in the desktop in order to fix the first point Let s suppose we start from the lower right corner so we ll click the mouse in the lower right region of the desktop Click O keyboard button in order to enable the orthogonal mode that allows you to exactly draw horizontal and vertical walls or select Orthogonal in the Application status bar While in this mode the mouse gives the direction where you want to draw the wall so you just need to type in the wall s length and confirm it with Enter keyboard button We re going to draw the wall that will contain the door so we ll move the mouse on the left side of the desktop and we ll type 196 8 finally Enter keyboard button note once defined the direction with the mouse leave it and don t move it again while typing While you are drawing you can Zoom the scene with the wheel mouse button or you can Pan the desktop keeping the wheel mouse button pressed and moving the mouse You can also click the right mouse button and select command Undo point if you need to rollback last wall DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 178 The Sample Project Move the mouse towards the top and type 160 in order to draw left vertical wall Press Enter keyboard button
148. endering process If you check the Activate check button you can decide the depth of the niche it usually will be less than the width of the wall so that you will be able to locate the niche in the wall Once you click OK the Application will ask you to displace the hole niche in the project you can see it s shape and drag it all around the room Keep the mouse over the internal side of the wall and click the left mouse button where you want to drop it Alternatively you can specify with the mouse the wall to refer to and type the distance between the hole niche and the left right corner you already know that you can switch between left and right field using the TAB button of the keyboard In the image on the right you can realize the difference between a hole left and a niche right bottom Sas i lt i e Hole niche properties Measures Niche Elevation Width 80 0 155 8 Activate Distance Height Depth 60 0 196 0 10 0 Position Internal Centred External Threshold Frame Activate Activate Mounting Badge eee i i ee Me Width Prominence Width Width te et se as Ss A B E F Prominence Prominence Width Width a SS SS Sloping roofs When you create a new project the Application create a ceiling for you The standard elevation of the ceiling and the height of the walls can be modified in the preferences options of the Application as you have seen in
149. endering process OK button or get to the Advanced options Global switches Displacement Limit depth Max depth Override mtl Image Sampler Antialiasing Type Min subdivs Max subdivs Cir thresh Show samples a gt ee ee Adaptive DMC 1 3 0 01 Hide advanced options TalkImace Create job DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide Panorama Size Panorama Rendering Parameters A Image size For Video Customized Y Multiplier x1 Mj 1515x852 Image Quality Default options Exposure control Options 88 For Printina Customized v Pixel Resolution 1515 x 852 Customized v Photographic Cancel Chapter 5 Rendering If you want to deepen your knowledge on the parameters available in the Advanced Options section we suggest you to read V Ray official documentation Refer to online official documentation from ChaosGroup http help chaosgroup com vray help 200R1 V Ray RT V Ray rendering engine allows you to render in different ways using CPU Central Processing Unit that is to say the standard processor available in any PC GPU Graphics processing unit the processor of the graphic card s available in the PC Consider that GPUs are dramatically faster than CPUs Moreover modern hardware can even host more than 1 single graphic card inside V Ray RT Real Time allows you to decide whether to use the CPU or the GPU in order to create the
150. ents Properties Ctrl D Share Ctrl H Send Menu Ss Options amp Close application There are useful printouts indeed that the Application can create for you In this section you can find examples of some of them Blueprint for the installer In the Layout window open the TOOLS section of the Ribbon and select the command Blueprint for the installer TOOLS DATABASE Fig Export ay EJ pS i Eh Print E Send Paper Web Print Blueprint for Floor Walls blueprint Estimate gaen Layout Layout the installer for the installer imate Layout Print This sheet contains very useful information for the installer as there is a detailed plan of the tiles to be placed in the floor Tile on floor Vano 4 DSO O ATLAS Stie Coma Marfi 65 Lappato 1 ETT 60 0080 0 Orat 0 0 cen 60 0 Parete 36 hee eee SSS SS SS SS So AASS 180 0 Parete 26 180 0 Parete 24 330 0 Parete 25 Aaea tw Asat ee arrene MENENS AAL AERD e ERS tya Same mrn hee a Psg DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 150 Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share aS Well as for each wall of the project Tiling Parete 23 S078 0 ATLASI Agnii ion Creare RETT 30 5e98 5 Geet 0 3 em 6676 0 ATLASI Ambition Ce me RETT 39 5191 5 Grout 0 3 om ACRI ATLASI Ambar Gord Mosace Deine 7 RETT IEAS Grout 0 3 om As you can see the walls printouts provide als
151. epending on the angle you are looking at it while different values change the highlights simulating brushed surfaces DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 119 Chapter 5 Rendering 4 d DW a Ci P Anisotropy 1 0 1 0 0 90 uN Anisotropy 1 0 1 0 090 Anisotropy 1 0 1 0 090 Anisotropy rot 0 360 0 0 00 Anisotropy rot 0 360 0 45 00 Anisotropy rot 0 360 0 90 00 Materials in projects In the paragraphs above you saw how to create new materials and save them in the internal database In this way the material will be stored and visible later on for further design by getting to the Components window if you are working in a Client Server all designers will see the new material too If you do not want this to happen you can create a new material just located in the project When the project is opened in the layout window select the command Materials available in the File Ss section of the Ribbon you will access the list of the materials currently available in the project If you modify or Materials create a new material starting from here you are not affecting the materials in database but just the ones in the Materials project CROMO GRIGIO CHIARO GRIGIO OPACO DefaultGrout SATINATO OPACO In case you change your mind later on and want to add the new material to the Application library database you can do it by selecting the material and clicking the button Add to database Note if you click this but
152. er it and select command Move if you want to relocate it Delete if you want to get rid of it Properties if you want to access object properties mask where you can change for example the elevation from the floor Measures Materials Modify 3D Miscellaneous Size Position Width X position 43 1 830 0 Depth Y position 55 3 453 0 Height Elevation 33 6 _ Keep proportions e Do the same steps in order to add the bidet and the radiator f When you add the shower tray we suggest you to temporarily disable the automatic alignment mode You can do that by clicking the keyboard Spacebar button once while still moving the object on the desktop clicking it again means to enable the mode again g Pick the shower tray object from the Components window and while you are moving it over the layout rotate it as you need using keyboard buttons or If you click the i keyboard button P stands for Point click it even many times see images in next page you can drag the object from a different snap select the one that is easier to be used depending on the object you have selected DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 180 The Sample Project h Complete the shower by placing the Shower head download it from the Live page if you don t have one or a Shower in TAPS AND FITTINGS level Let s save again the project by selecting the button on top of the Ribbon Ca or clicking the keyboard buttons S Ctrl
153. er of tiles Estimate window _ ina box value Has not to be 0 1 is default unless differently specified How to hide furnishing elements Right click on the object and select Hide command This works only in Layout from virtual navigation and or window rendering Tiling and Navigation Issue Solution How to tile wall thickness on the _ It willbe automatic if window position is external Differently enable Surface setting window before dropping the tile on the needed area I m applying a panel on the floor but The panel setting is for Walls Open it again change its use to FLOOR save it and try see just a strip on the floor tiling again How to manually rotate a tile You can manually insert a single tile in the modify tiling window Use the Add a tile button in the Wall group of the Ribbon Select the tile and press P keyboard _ button to change dragging point and K amp L to rotate tile How to change starting point forthe You can save your view using the button My view or F3 shortcut and Save _ virtual navigation window current Opening Virtual Navigation window Check your graphic card driver and update it if necessary If still is not enough go to DomuS3D stops working the Application Properties mask File Options and reduce some quality and or effects in the Navigation pane such as transparency reflection antialiasing Rendering Issue Solution receive an Out Of Memory error There is no mo
154. er service may be entered a standby status This is not due to _ Connection write send DomuS3D Restart your computer and start again the Application DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 196 Appendix What s new in Pegasus comparing to Antares detailed list Application interface Ribbon and shortcuts The Ribbon is new and Metro style compliant Windows 8 and Office 2013 All icons have been redesigned for a better user experience Here are some samples Of fa s DomuS3D Pegasus Live FILE HOME DATABASE S fm oo eww amp bA aBn E T f IE If gt gt S a Te Rectangle gt ma Services E2 gt ly w LO S y Open Create mir DXF TouchFly TouchFly Esegui DB Language Home Restore Catalogs Show Side by side room grom Editor RenderJob Manager X loading X Projects Catalogue Miscellaneous Live Components Window DA fa fa DomuS3D Pegasus Layout Dinal FILE HOME LAYOUT CAD VIRTUAL NAVIGATION TOOLS DATABASE ay ty kes Width i a A Tel tH a Floor amp Tile objects A ry gall 2 Split OM O Oh Ea EE Einsidewalls f Modify e A Move Move Create New Furnishing Draw Modify Group Tile pz Photo2D Navigate Full wall opening niche Jh Height Elements X X room AX Delete Hy Tile Cpe X screen management InsideWalls Furnishing elements Wall Photo2D 3D Views B l fA S fa DomuS3D Pegasus Layout Dinal FILE HOME LAYOUT CAD VIRTUAL NAVIG
155. er with mental ray in fact now it is possible to use V Ray when rendering the scenes When you purchase A the Professional license you can choose one of the engines V Ray is the default one if not differently requested If you want to add the second one you have to order it separately Compared with mental ray V Ray differs in gt Simplicity even if the rendering process involves so many variables and parameters V Ray is equipped with automatic algorithms that allow users to easily get photographic images of the scene Presets low medium and high quality together with the automatic exposure system make easier for the user to engage the rendering process eve if he she is not expert in rendering techniques Same as with digital cameras if you want to get a good result you have to avoid backlight and overexposed areas usually it is enough to take care that the sun does not enter the scene in front of the observer Here s an example of a rendering made with the automatic exposure algorithm DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 200 Appendix After the first rendering image made with the automatic exposure algorithm you can setup the scene parameters starting from the setup the Engine has found for you as a result you ll save time in order to setup the scene s parameters prior launching the rendering Di 3 Per il video Personalizzata Moltiplicatore v 1497x891 x1 I tri Qualta Inmagine at Valore diEsposizione 11
156. erecass edict a a a ned tak la a Lak an boa siclas tal tes 194 Tiling GHGIN CVU CATION sas wesie abate a aeecalsa cos aaa alates ss ea eatne Pee mm ne eaRlababower ame Hee 195 Rend CTE wh Schade rat cicstinnal E E sea tehbio ned itesnees 195 Unexpect d SUUTACWH sistiese dela Celta eine a AE EEE EE EEEE 196 WHAT S NEW IN PEGASUS COMPARING TO ANTARES DETAILED LIST ccccceeeesesssssnneeeeeeeeeeeees 197 Application interface Ribbon and shortcuts nnnnnnnnnnensnsessssessesssssssssseseeee 197 Live pa SC arcs EA EAA A E adh ans ce EA E aren tien 197 Dvid nea TOOM Sie E E A N 197 Navigation windOW seesssessseseeesssssssesssssessssssseseeeeeereensssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssst 198 Change strips height manually eeeeseeeeesseseeeeeeseenrrnrererrrrrrerrerereerrereeeeereerreeeeeeeee 198 Change strips height with tiles number ooooeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeererrrerrrrrrrrererreeeseeeeee 199 SHOW CL DON COMET S aa E E EA EEE TEE ERT IE TR 199 Tiles layer eeina ea E EE AOE EE EEE 199 Tiles layer and vertical tiling eeeeeeeeeseeesseseseeeesesererrrrrrrrrrerrrerrreerererereeerrrrerrereeeeeee 199 ESMAO eini a cA Scat ne E E E E 200 V Ray new rendering CH OUIE ease snes sai oalhu a dae Gute atn sind dala eben ean dua Poe anita tnlannee tet 200 Dynamic rendering With V Ray RT cccccccccccccccccccccccccc cece cece cece cece cece cece eee EEE E EEE EEE E EE EES 201 Distributed rendering With V Ray occccccccccccccccccccccccc
157. eric maximum 80 characters collezione Collection the item belongs to alohanumeric maximum 40 characters DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 162 Chapter 7 Database desc_serie Series the item belongs to alohanumeric maximum 40 characters in_produzione Set to YES if the item is still produced by the Manufacturer NO differently old items has to be left in the application database in case you want to re open old project in the future Alohanumeric maximum 4 characters tipo_formato Description of the geometry of the tile alphanumeric maximum 8 characters RETT ESAG OTTA TRIA TRAP QTTO ROMB PENTDX PENTSX RETT formato Item format expressed in millimeters alohanumerical maximum 32 characters Ex 200x200 400x400x100 In case of ESAG OTTA TRIA TRAP QTTO format types the third dimension is the length of the oblique side peso_unitario Item weight per single unit expressed in kilograms numerical maximum 2 decimals separated by dot nrpz_confezione Number of pieces per pack integer unita_misura Sale unit measure for the item alphanumerical maximum 4 characters NR PZ MQ ML data_genlist Price list generation date format DD MM YYYY Ex 24 02 2002 data_declistO Date the price list is effective from format DD MM YYYY Ex 12 05 2002 cod_listinoO Price list code alohanumeric maximum 16 characters there can be multi
158. es mask can be opened by clicking on File gt Options HOME LAYOUT CAD VIRTUAL NAVIGATION TOOLS R Recent documents WebPlanner 3 Open Ctrl 0 Save project Ctri S LH gt Saveas Ctrl Shift S Close Ctrl F4 Delete Attachments Properties Ctrl D Ctrl H Print Import Export External documents 3 Send Menu Ss Options Close application We suggest you to have a look at it before starting planning so that you can customize your Application behaviour The Options also called Preferences mask later on in this manual contains various sections let s have a look at them one by one General General Measures Layout Navigation and Rendering Hardware key System Variables Events Blueprint for the installer V Display elements in Modify Tiling Automatic dimensions Advanced items selection tiles panels furn elements Ting origin dimension Tile Numbers in Technical Printouts Tile Colors in Technical Printouts Strips height Load save project on file V Perimeter tiling continuous Dynamic tips Tooltips WordML Editor Restore Show C Internal Microsoft Word 2007 or newer Print Company detailed data Locate application on disk Cancel O Show tiles in wireframe mode Allows a quick and general view of the tiles that are laid enabling this box allows viewing each tile in a different singl
159. esult of the Multiple selection replacement procedure DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 71 Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials Cover the walls Tile all walls with a single tile solid pattern strip by strip Note that when you work on walls each time you drag amp drop a tile over a wall you create a new Strip on it Basically you create a sort of dynamic panel by adding strip by strip sections to the panel Of course you have all the control you need in order to change the panel configuration anytime We will see how in the next few paragraphs Open the Navigation window and select the Tiles section in the Components window Search the tile you want to apply on the walls Before dragging the tile check the tiles control panel in order to 6 Set the operation mood on the walls button A ga BH Ei CS amp fa A 7 Set the grout value and color you need for the walls Grout 00 Rotation 0 0 8 Specify the number of tile lines you want in the strip B Hrows 1B Strip New C 9 In C you are telling the Application that you want to create a new Destination Align Left strip rather than applying the tile to an existing one 10 Set the destination to Current room D Now the Application knows the way you want to apply the tile so you can click the left mouse button over the tile image drag amp drop it over the wall doesn t matter which wall as you are covering Current room that s to say all walls
160. et them better understanding the way of laying tiles DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 79 Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials Rotate existing tiling If you need to change the rotation of an existing tiling you have to operate in the 2D Modify tiling window From the Navigation window click the right mouse button over the wall surface where you want to rotate the tiling select the command Modify tiling You will open a window where you can see the wall surface in 2D Click the right mouse button on the tiling you want to orientate and select command Change tiling direction You ll be able to align the existing tiles in a different direction both using the left mouse button quick but less accurate or writing the angle you want to rotate with and press the Enter keyboard J button Ang le 360 Om Note don t be mislead by the command available in the Ribbon WALL section Wall group Modify Rotate tiling That command allows you to rotate areas that can be tiled Refer to Tile an insert paragraph earlier in this Chapter Switch view from Floor to Walls in 2D When you are in the 2D Modify tiling window you can easily change your view by moving the mouse on the border of the current area In the next image in fact you can see that if you move the mouse over a wall a yellow area will appear if you click that area the window will upgrade showing you the wall you have just selected Same option can be used
161. et you see the way object deformation varies orange line depending on the OR we ve assigned to the glass Main Parameters Diffuse Color E 22 22 22 0 Roughness Reflection Reflection Color _ 255 255 255 Reflection Glossines 100 Glossiness Quality amp Fresnel reflections Fresnel IOR 1 70 Refraction Refraction Color 255 255 255 Refraction Glossines 100 Glossiness Quality amp a m Index of refraction QOR 1 00 Index of refraction OR 1 70 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 110 Chapter 5 Rendering Fog color parameter allows you to control the attenuation of light as it passes through the material as you can see in the images This option allows to simulate the fact that thick objects look less transparent than thin objects Note that the effect of the fog color depends on the absolute size of the objects and is therefore scene dependent The fog color also determines the look of the object when using translucency In real life in fact thin objects are more transparent than thick objects As you can imagine grey scale color do not affect the color but just the transparency effect while RGB colors change the color of the object too In these images you can see the way Fog Color affects the material provided that Diffuse Color and Reflection Color have not been modified set to black Fog Color E 2 89 162 Fog Color E 222 55 89 Fog Color 7 Fog Multiplier
162. etric light this light simulates the behaviour of real lights also affected by or affecting other objects effects Photometric lights are based on some basic parameters luminous flux luminance and light intensity This set of variables allows you to place more detailed and real lights for a better result and rendered image You can use one of the Preset values in order to change light intensity they are real light available on the market and their power is expressed in Watts Note that different lights will generate different illumination effects even with the same Watt power Candela cd or Lumen Im The preview image will help you better understanding what s the selected light behaviour and shape Soft Shadows laea bhi Ha elect Wie Meg Taciri v oR Diovi Quality Physical light this type of light can be used only with mental ray In physical lights you can use preset as seen in the paragraph above but also IES light IES lights are prepared and shared by the manufacturer with the real features of the light Manufacturer makes available a file with ies extension where the rendering engine can find all details for the rendering process If the standard lights irradiate merely wherever in the space 360 IES lights can provide the engine detailed information about the direction intensity and decay in all directions For this reason using the correct IES allows you to avoid any problem related to wrong ligh
163. exion http www 3dconnexion com It s made for gaming as design and graphic environments as it is easy to move in the flexible controller it is made of as you can see in this image Navigator moving in the scene becomes fluent and natural mouse moving is not continuous while with SN you can walk without stopping anytime When used together with the mouse it allows you to work with two hands while in Navigation window with the Space Navigator you move in the scene with the mouse you drag amp drop tiles objects and make modifications You can dramatically save time while planning and especially let your customers say WOW when you let them moving in the room in so a natural way In the following image you can see Space Navigator flexibility and movements allowed Space Navigator is not included in the Application and can be ordered separately while purchasing the software or online with third party vendors Refer to 3dconnexion web site for further information about this optional hardware well as for technical space thanks to the With Space using keyboard and along the scene Individual Axes Speed Reversed Pan Right Left O Pan Up Down O Zoom O v Tilt oO V Spin O Roll O Use standard view points Center f Front Standard views do not allow to walk in the scene but they are a quick way to get to predefined Allet FlRight locations in the room os Back Top In the Ribbon in the Navigation group you can find
164. external files eae The Application will ask you to locate the file on disk Select it and confirm importation Fiat o You will be asked to confirm object scale prior importing it in the layout where you can position it the same way you do with standard objects from the library Remember that this object will live just inside the project it s been placed into as it has not been imported in the library too If you want to import it in the library you can choose one of following options in the Ribbon open the Database group and in the Furnishing elements section select Elements management gt New Here you can specify item code description etc and load the external file by using the mport button Alternatively and this command may be useful also in order to group more elements as a single item in the library you can select the command File gt Database gt Furnishing elements gt New gt Select items group as you can see in the next image LAYOUT CAD VIRTUAL NAVIGATION T x Sa E From application database DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 62 Chapter 3 Elements Mita Sers FILE HOME LAYOUT CAD VIRTUAL NAVIGATION TOOLS fee New gt File gt Modify gt Tak Open Ctrl O Draw gt Insert gt se e Virtual t x Save project Ctri S a LH View gt Bem Renderi gt Zz Saveas Ctrl Shift S Mi Database b Details mai Close Ctrl F4 Tools Tables E Live d Internal price list O Delete
165. f you want to see more doors Drag the door you want with the left mouse button move it on the project desktop and release the mouse pointer Move the mouse over the internal wall you want to place the door vs in and you ll see that the door automatically rotates aligning to that wall Finally move the door over the bottom wall type 18 in order to specify exact distance between the door and the corner Click Enter keyboard button If you want to switch the dimension field to type ROOMS TILES COOPLEGNO LUALDI LAYINGS MATICAD MOBIL3 PANELS MENTS uj T gt A S MATERIALS in use Tab z keyboard button while still moving the door Double click on the door in order to open door properties window here you can adjust door dimensions as well as decide if having the right left handle and many other properties B Hole niche properties Measures Niche Elevation Width 0 0 88 0 Activate Distance Height Depth 70 0 210 0 0 N osition Internal Centred External Threshold Frame Activate v Activate Mounting Badge Width Prominence Width Width A B 1 0 E 1 0 F Prominence Prominence Width Width Cc D 12 0 G 10 0 H Other p ties j _ Right opening v Show door opening Do the same process in order to place a window go back in the selection of the FURNISHING ELEMENTS section of the Components window select ARCHITECTURAL level WINDOWS or DYNAMIC WINDOWS level You wil
166. floor walls countertops objects in many ways change materials we encourage you to plan as much as possible in Navigation window if you re operating together with your customer so that he she will have the opportunity of keeping concentrated on the 3D of the scene From within this window deciding the best point of view to refer to you will launch the rendering process so that you can create a photograph of the scene The graphic quality you see in the Navigation window in fact is not the best you can achieve with the Application the best one can be reached by using one of the available optional Rendering Engines Even if the Navigation window graphic quality will never be as good as the rendering one you can tune it up by getting to the Preferences Options mask as you saw in the Introduction chapter Remember indeed that the maximum Navigation quality can be used just with high performance graphic cards and computers How to open Navigation If you just created your first project the only opened window apart the LivePage of the project is the ai Layout So you need to open the Navigation window once you want to start seeing the project in 3D You ace can do this in 3 different ways creen management 1 Select the Navigate button available in the Ribbon refer to Virtual Navigation group 2 Use keyboard shortcut F6 unless you have customized it in a different way 3 Click the right mouse button wherever apart on
167. for the Client Server Version cccccccccccccccccccccccccecscecsesessssesseeees 158 TME Se oie enai csvset tai E EERE AE eh ulesa us A ed sh via E eae A EE teta sel ayaa tease ae 159 Create your own SINGICTIIC aac ited ete ada iel aes ab oon tees 159 Load multiple tiles with 1 CICK sgcscucs scccruverscasticcraruieesdaaiccdssiabisedecisans seververcaanccssciess 159 FURNISHING ELEMENTS 3D OBJECTS cccccccssseecccccesssecsccuesseccescuusccscuuesecsseuueeccsseuueecssesuanseeess 160 Load a new object in the TIDIAY sccaiccsaceccteiccabacs VaseasiawcedssasVncenstav odds Vesccstewceabcae s 160 Group existing objects in a single item in librafy ooooeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeesssssesssesseeeene 161 Load complete pricelist in the Application database ccccccccccccccccccceceseeseeseseeeeees 162 CHAPTER 8 TOUCHELY MODULE srseriniisiinnnn 165 TOUCHFLY AVAILABLE IN ULTIMATE VERSION cssssccessseccesseeecesseecceseececessaeecessaeecessaeesesaaes 165 WHAT CAN TDO WITH TOUCHPEY nonoman i ities ems tence amie 165 Complete extend the Application libraries 165 Share and Visualize the extended libraries on the iPAD cccccccce cee 165 Share and Visualize the extended libraries on Touch Screens in my Showroom 165 Create multi room panoramas cccccceecceeeseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaas 166 USING THE EDITOR animarea i e AE GEA E TO ONO deis nite Seid aniseed a Aite 166 How to customize extend an existing ca
168. formation regarding how to use mental ray and V Ray we suggest you to read the related section Chapter 5 O Grouts The underline grouts check allows you to enhance the lines in between the tiles in order to better see the grout Sometimes this effect may be useful in case of bright colours of the tiles or in case of small grout values O Panorama size With this field you can setup the default size in pixel for 360 Panoramas Hardware key General Measures Layout Navigation and Rendering Hardware key System Variables Events Enabled modules Key code 00 General commands 30 client A 01 AutoDB 30 cient 2125512019 02 Price list management 30 client 04 Opening DB 30 client 11 Standalone 30 client 14 Client Server 30 dient 15 Carpets catalogue 30 client 16 Account system link 30 cient Buy an upgrade 18 Export 30 client 19 Advanced rendering mental ray 30 cient Apply Update 21 Tiling 30 dient 22 Shop Assistant 30 dient Collect info 23 3ds max plugin 30 cient 24 Eureca2008 30 dient 25 TalkImage 30 dient Show additional information Locate application on disk o Cancel This section lists you on the left pane of the mask the modules that currently are enabled in your key license On the right side you can see starting from top Key code This is the code of your key license That code will be needed by the Support Team in case you need to r
169. g file contains all information about the rendering process image size point of view time to be rendered as well as all the rendering parameters etc It s worth to have a look at it even later on and it is also useful to save this file together with the rendered image and the project file zip or rpk Ej File Modifica Formato Visualizza D Render Manager vray64 MNVRenderer64 exe Release 14 0 Build 516 Rendered on Image generated D Jobs Living CPadana_Soggiorno4_VRc1_7_x2 png Image size 2934 x 1650 pixel Eye position 9578mm 379mm 1073mm Target position 9577mm 380mm 1073mm FOV deg Render Start Tue Mar 18 09 22 44 2014 Render End Tue Mar 18 09 48 01 2014 Film speed ISO Vignetting White RGB DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 143 Chapter 5 Rendering Bibliography mental ray English books 1 mental ray for Maya 3ds Max and XSI A 3D Artist s guide to Rendering Boaz Livny Published by SYBEX 2 Rendering with mental ray amp 3ds Max Joep van der Steen Published by Focal Press 3 Realistic Architectural Visualization with 3ds Max and mental ray Roger Cusson and Jamie Cardoso Pubished by Focal Press mental ray Italian books 1 mental ray per Autodesk 3ds Max e Autodesk VOZ Matteo Magnazzi e Stefano Armeni Published by AM4 educational V Ray English books 1 http viscorbel com OnLine Documentation and Tutorial 2 Architectural Rendering with 3dsMax and V Ray Photorealistic Visali
170. g from the advanced rendering settings available rendering for mental ray only Dark image for a multi room project Check your openings doors windows open their properties mask Emit diffuse lighting should be on You can increase light power with the multiplier control How to remove light source Reduce Highlight reflection value from the material settings If necessary you can reflection from the material use 0 too reflection There is a black background outside Increase the Max Bounce Number from the advanced rendering settings _ the window How to adjust it Unexpected shutdown Issue Solution Application has stopped working If very after project creation you save it you re safe DomuS3D in fact while I m creating a project Did automatically saves a backup copy of the project while you draw step by step So loose my project next time you restart DomuS3D the Application will ask you if you want to restore previous project version You shouldn t loose any work Application has stopped working Check your graphic card driver and update it if necessary Also check the Application opening Virtual navigation window Preferences File Options and disable some Navigation effects or antialiasing or low down the quality to intermediate levels Application has stopped working Check your graphic card driver and update it if necessary while opening Modify tiling window ODBC ERROR SQL Server driver The SQL Serv
171. g up the project in order to achieve stunning images A rendering engine in fact is similar to a camera where you need to setup illumination information prior getting a photo In this paragraph you will learn how to manage lights and the related effects in order to increase V Ray results V Ray gives you four different kind of lights natural light Sun and Environment photometric light IES lights Sun light sun and sky V Ray simulates sun and sky light thanks to the VRaySun and VRaySky parameters which are strictly connected For a deeper knowledge of WVRaySun and VRaySky you can connect to the official reference from V Ray manufacturer http help chaosgroup com vray help 150SP1 vraysun_ sky param htm If you want to open the sun light mask click on the Ribbon command Natural Light available in the Virtual Natural Lights Navigation group You can find it both in the Layout window and in the Navigation window Navigation group i In the next image you can see this mask Natural light a viv O re Activate Vv Multiplier 0 1 10 1 00 Scale 0 1 10 1 00 Invisible rm Soft shadow quali 8 Turbidity 3 00 Ozone 0 35 Environment type Sky color __ 255 255 25 3 Elevation 0 90 456 Azimuth 180 180 0G Daytime preset Nighttime preset Lox cane e gt Sun light section Activate this flag allows you to enable disable the sun light If disab
172. gn and MetallicPaint for mental ray VRayMtl for V Ray and the typology as you select one of the preset materials the values in the right pane will be changed copying the ones of the selected preset Start from them in order to modify the material as you need for example duplicate a wood keeping the same texture and changing the finish of the surface First parameter Diffused Color is related to the color of the material this color will be used by the engine in case you will not specify a texture for the material Click with the left mouse button on the small coloured area if you want to change it If instead of the color you want to assign a texture image to the material such as for wood marble textile masonry etc check the Activate control available in the Diffuse Map section Click the File field and you will see a button that allows you to browse your computer and select the image you want to use for the material If you want to delete the texture from the material uncheck the Activate control In the next images you can see a material using a color left and a second one using a texture right Diffuse Level 100 Diffuse Color E 204 204 204 0 textures MATERIALI_HI Rughness allows you to simulate dusty surfaces The next images allows you to see the difference of
173. h collection but remember to keep trace of this path in the Excel spreadsheet Secondly you have to fill in the Excel DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 159 Chapter 7 Database spreadsheet you will receive from the Support Team containing all the technical information of the tiles such as item code description collection name format etc the Excel has to be saved as txt file so that the Application can read it and import all tiles with one click Refer to Support Team look at the last section of the manual in order to find contact details in order to receive the Excel spreadsheet together with the information for importing multiple tiles Furnishing elements 3D Objects Load a new object in the library You can import your own 3D objects in the internal library in order to customize it as you need Note if the elements you need are already available in the DomuS3D Cloud you can download them by connecting to the Live Page note the download service may not be included in the version you bought received There are tons of element on the Internet e g you can find many DAE files connecting to https 3dwarehouse sketchup com Search your typology and download object If DAE is not available proceed by downloading the SketchUp version and use free SketchUp software to export the object in DAE format You always have to refer to 3D objects 2D are not enough for DomuS3D in case they are in DXF format check they have bee
174. has NOT to reflect the same way all over the area but you have more or less reflective zones over it even different pixel by pixel If you want indeed an area that reflects the same way all over i e a mirror you d not need to use reflection map as you can work around Reflection level in main properties Scale same as in Diffuse map scale Default is 250 Bump map Activate if enabled File field texture will be used for the mapping other fields are enabled just if this one is checked File contains full path of the texture map file to be used for the material This button allows you to browse your disk in order to find out the needed file grey scale image to be used for the bump Scale same as in Diffuse map scale Default is 250 Multiplier adjusts bump intensity and bump direction emboss positive or negative The default value is 1 By setting this value to 3 or 10 the influence of roughness map on the same material is higher and the result is better Do not apply it to diffuse shading By using this parameter the roughness map to the diffuse shading material will be not applied DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 134 Advanced parameters Anisotropy it is the ratio between width and height referred to the area where the light reflects If this value is 1 you are disabling this parameter Anisotropy Rotation is the opportunity of setting up a rotation in the area where the light reflects O means that
175. he door and the left corner In case you want to refer to the right one click the TAB keyboard button to switch to the right distance and type again that distance If you want to place a window go back to the components section search windows by browsing typologies or by writing window in the search field then follow up the same steps as before as windows have the same behavior as doors Note that doors and windows can be dragged only on the internal side of the wall They can be dropped only when you start seeing the double measure system if you don t see it it means that the mouse cursor is not over the internal side of the wall If you wan to exit the procedure click the keyboard button or even the right mouse button Finally let s talk about the difference between Doors and Dynamic Doors typology A dynamic door window is not a static object and can be opened closed by the designer while in navigation by clicking the left mouse button over the door window handle Keep in mind that usually windows are transparent hence sun light always passes through doors will not let it get in the scene if they are closed By opening them if they are dynamic will allow some sun light enter the room Placing objects in layout From Chapter 3 Placing a 3D object in the project layout is as easy as placing a door These are the steps to follow in order to add an object to the project 1 Search the object in the components window 2 When
176. he Components window pick up your material drag and object s layer drop it on the needed layer Change tiling position to align floor Right click on floor and select Modify tiling position Move the mouse cursor on the and wall grout _ walls tile corner and click on it to align floor to this corner How to apply a background on a Click the Background button in the Navigation group of the Ribbon Refer to the virtual navigation Navigation chapter to find more details How to create a column wall _ Refer to Chapter 1 to find more details How to share a project on the iPad Select Save Panorama 360 button in the Navigation group of the Ribbon Select DomuS3D Box to send it by mail Install the free App called DomuS3D Box on the tablet then go the emails section and click the Panorama image How to put an object in the plan with Switch off Snap settings from the status bar When moving the object click the right _a detailed position _ mouse button and choose Point Delta option How to draw a vertical or horizontal While drawing press O keyboard button in order to enable disable the line in the layout window Orthogonal snap settings mood cannot see my velux in the virtual Could be a problem on the angle or the windows length Go to the window _ navigation properties mask try to change some values and check again in the Navigation SQL Server Error when opening Try to check your tiles data This failure may be caused by a wrong Numb
177. he list of default shortcuts available with installation As you already know you can customize them as you need The red cells refer to shortcuts it is better to leave unchanged as they are used by the Application Shortcut Command Usable in window Ctrl Z Undo last operation All Ctrl Y Repeat last operation All Ctrl N New project All Ctrl O Open project All Ctrl S Save project All Ctrl Shift S Save project as allows you to duplicate current project All Ctrl D Open project details All Ctrl F4 Close current project All Ctrl W Close current window close project if window is Layout All Ctrl I Open image All Alt F4 Close Application All Shift F6 Navigate project switch to or open navigation window Layout Views management manage saved views or save current one Layout Navigation Ctrl P Get the estimate of the project All Delete selected entity Layout Ctrl Del Delete tiles from the project you can specify which tiles to remove Floor Walls Objects All DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 22 Initial operations and configurations settings Ctrl T Open wall window 2D Layout Shift F7 Open FULL SCREEN navigation window Layout Shift M select and Move objects Layout Ctrl U Create a 3D Cube box Layout Alt H Change wall height Layout Alt 0O Create a hole niche in the wall Layout Alt M Move wall Layout Alt T Draw text Layout 2D Wall Ctrl C Copy tiled areas 2D Wall Ctrl V Paste copied tiled areas 2D Wall Zoom window Layout 2
178. he movement using the left mouse button you can specify ANY point in the screen as the starting and ending point are just references for the Application in order to understand how far you want to move that wall Secondly you will select the destination point Notice that you can do it both using the mouse clicking with the left mouse button where you want the destination point to be set or even typing the distance of the movement in the available fields one is for the length of the movement the second one is related to the movement orientation you can switch from one to the other with the keyboard button Select the destination point DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 39 Quick Step Guide In case you make any mistake use the shortcut z or the UNDO button in the upper left corner of the Application window as you can see in the image The opposite of UNDO is REDO the specular button whose shortcut is Y Placing doors and windows From Chapter 3 Architectural elements such as doors and windows usually are the first items to be placed in the project When you install the software you already have some doors and windows in the Application library First of all open the layout window of the project as doors and windows can be placed just in this window Next step is to search for the door you want to place in the project in the components section the vertical panel on the left unless you have moved it somewhere e
179. he toilet repeat same steps as before left aligning the tiles use a different tile colour in order to better distinguish walls while navigating Livel Planimetria Bigne Tutorial cop X BE eee Let s tile the shower box corner h Move the point of view so that so that you can see the shower box and the corner between the walls as you Can see in next image If the shower box does not allow you to operate go to the layout window click the right mouse button over it and select Hide remember to show it again when done i Go back in the Navigation window click the right mouse button in the corner and select command Corner Tile shower box corner X Layout Sample Project X BGG mas 5 Se Wal Change tile Restore neutral tile Highlight replaceable formats Tile material Data New strip Strip height Delete strip Move strip up Move strip down Modify strip origin Change Grout Modify tiling Copy tiling Paste tiling Delete tiling Modify tiling position Create off shaded effect Resize tiling area Empty tiling area Tiling area properties Delete image Tiles layer Vertical tiling Tile shower box corner Corner j Select the tiles to be used in the left and right panel of the shower box set the grout value and colour Finally check the left and right panel dimensions depending on the size of the shower box you have chosen see image next page k Ifthe right panel has the same
180. he wall you understand about the right position as the wall color changes to blue and a small tooltip tells you the wall size On the internal side of the wall click the right mouse button as you can see in the image and select command Move The Application now asks you to specify the first starting point of the movement using the left mouse button you can specify ANY point in the screen as the starting and ending point are just references for the Application in order to understand how far you want to move that wall Secondly you will select the destination point Notice that you can do it both using the mouse clicking with the left mouse button where you want the destination point to be set or even typing the distance of the movement in the available fields one is for the length of the movement the second one is related to the movement orientation you can switch from one to the other with the keyboard button In case you make any mistake use the shortcut z or the UNDO button in the upper left corner of the Application window as you can see in the image The opposite of UNDO is REDO the specular button whose shortcut is Y Walls height and width Move the mouse cursor on the internal side of the wall as you have seen in the section above On the internal side of the wall click the right mouse button and select command Width you have now the opportunity of seeing the current wall s width and mod
181. his is a very useful opportunity when you have Zoomed In Out and Panned your project and you quickly need to restore the full view of it If you right click in the layout window a context menu will appear A context menu is a list of commands dedicated to the object entity you have just selected se This image shows a context menu related to a corner notice the title any title s context menu tells you I epeatlacrcommand What it refers to Beemden r Try to practice a bit in order to notice that the position where you right click the mouse is very important Mave if you right click inside the room you will see all generic commands and the ones related to rooms if you right click over the internal side of the wall you will see all commands related to walls if you right click over one of the lines of an object you will see all commands related to objects if you right click over a light or one if its lines you will see all commands related to lights So this is a very useful shortcut in order to get to the most useful commands you need to use for a certain item With your keyboard If you want to Zoom In Out without the mouse you can also use the and keyboard buttons means Zoom In ie means Zoom Out DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 48 Chapter 1 Layout Modification Move walls You can move any wall from within the layout window First of all move the mouse cursor on the internal side of t
182. his section allows you to drag amp drop a light in the project Double click is not enabled in this panel as you cannot change the light properties lights in fact are listed depending their own and specific properties DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 32 Initial operations and configurations settings Images Components This section lists the images that you can Drag amp Drop in your project _ The images will be applied in the layer surface you will drop them into adapting their size depending w og on the container size You can add your own images to this section by just simply manually pasting the JPG or PNG file you want to add in the DomuS3D Bitmap Image folder i pa If you do not remember where you installed the program you can ask the application to open the ll setup folder for you by clicking the Locate application on Disk button you can find in the Program i t ib Options window File gt Options or the application log window you can open it by clicking at the Se See same time the E Grafica 919 Grafica_o DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 33 Catalogues download CATALOGUES DOWNLOAD DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 34 Catalogues download The Catalogues Download service DomuS3D Pegasus allows you to download tiles panels furnishing elements materials patterns and projects over the Internet from the Live page This module is not included in the standard version of
183. horo to oceno to Matcad ciowa Server Puen OA ra CEI retai an aea DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 169 Chapter 8 TouchFly Click the icon on the left named Tap here to connect to a DomuS3D server running on the local network You will enter the login mask leave the default username and password and click Login button see next image Saw KIENS a Default Administrator Next step is to select the server if more than one to synchronize your iPad from In the following image you can see that there are 2 available DomuS3D servers in the LAN You may have just 1 in case you have a single license and it should be the name of your computer e marno PCPUBBLICAZIONE pomassimo DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 170 Chapter 8 TouchFly Once selected the computer you will access the Playlist panel where you can see all the Playlists available on the selected PC Select the one you want to synchronize with and click Reload Note if you modify update the content of a Playlist in the PC and reload it in the iPad by synchronizing to the same Playlist the iPad will be updated with the new content Note if you synchronize to a different Playlist TouchFly will remove the old Playlist in the iPad and install just the new one So this is to say that you can t have more than one Playlist at the same time in the iPad Browsing the catalogue in TouchFly for iPad Once the synchronization of the Play
184. ht which is of course blue based is very evident as we ve increased its typical values for demonstration purposes Sun light Multiplier 0 1 10 it is the level intensity of the light 1 by default Increase decrease it in order to have a brighter darker scene We suggest you to have some practice on it just having simple rooms and small renderings in order to better understand how to use it Shadow softness 0 1 10 refers to the dimension of the area where the shadows decreases to zero 1 by default Higher values make shadows more soft lower values make shadows more tough Soft shadow quality 0 50 refers to the softness quality A higher value means a better quality of softness even if the price to pay then is more time to render Elevation 0 90 this value has to be provided in degrees referring to the vertical position of the sun at noon In this image you can see the sun placed at 45 This simulation represents the sky on your head where the project is placed right in the middle of given space If you move the sun down nearer 0 a you have a lower intensity which is typical of the sunset sunrise Sun at 90 means you are at noon when the 45 intensity illumination is the a maximum possible You can modify sun elevation by Left clicking the mouse over the yellow circle keep the mouse pressed and move it in the new position Cursor movement changes at the same time Elevation and Azimuth 0 Proj
185. ic Adapter DVD drive Internet connection 3D Joystick SpaceMouse SpaceNavigator Windows Vista with SP2 Windows 7 with SP1 Windows 8 1 or later x86 32 bit as well as x64 64 bit version Application is a 32 bit software while the rendering module is available both in 32 and 64 bit Intel Core i5 i7 recommended or similar later processors better if quad core or more Better if 7 200 rom recommended 10 000 rpm for desktop PC s and SSD for laptops Application needs 3 8 GB free for installation depending on installed modules but we suggest having at least 30 GB free disk space available for the Application for projects and new tiles sanitary ware and 3D objects catalogues you will download 4 GB for 32 bit systems minimum 8 GB better if 16 GB or more for 64 bit systems For a smooth and efficient navigation a high performance graphics card is recommended supporting DirectX 11 0 or later with at least 1 GB dedicated RAM 2 GB recommended We also suggest you to refer to the following link where you can find graphic cards we have specifically tested http www domus3d com en Public_Area Info_Ar ea requisiti htm This page will be kept up do date when new versions of the program will be published Warmly discouraged cards integrated in processor To install the Application unless download from the Internet In order to download new catalogues and libraries application patches access
186. ick over the corner This will lead you to the mask you can see in the next page DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 76 Left side Use tiles Use a panel Rot CREMA MARFIL GLOSS 34X34 34 0 Width Height 1 2 N Columns 1 E N Rows cen Right side V Same as left Use tiles Use a panel Select E 0 0 Grout 0 0 Rot Tiling origin 0 0 Elevation Centre Show corner box when closing this mask Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials Vertex ox Cancel gt Here you can decide which tile to apply to the tiled corner as well as its size Left and right areas ca be identical or different Vertical tiling Vertical tiles can be placed in the project when you are in the Navigation window Click the right mouse button on the wall you want to refer to and select command Vertical tiling You will access the mask where to specify the size of the vertical area you can do it typing the area dimension or specifying the number of tiles you want the area to include Finally select the tile to be placed in the vertical tiling remember to check rotation if the tiles images are not oriented the right way DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 77 Tile an insert Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials You can draw square areas on the tiled floor or walls of the project when you
187. id if ft i the templates dimensions are not the ones you really need if the shape is the one that you iiaii need it is far better to use it and change the walls dimensions in the layout window rather than designing it from scratch As you see in this image the components window has a section called rooms this section contains room templates that you can use in order to easily create new projects or new rooms with that shape If you do not have any opened project and you double click on the template you need the Application will let you creating a new project based on that template You just need to assign the customer name info in order to better search and find that project later on and you ll be in ready to start tiling or placing objects If you already have an opened project and you double click a template you will be able to add a second room in the current project that now becomes a multi room project we ll concentrate on multi rooms projects later on in this Manual Move walls From Chapter 1 You can move any wall from within the layout window First of all move the mouse cursor on the internal side of the wall you understand about the right position as the wall color changes to blue and a small tooltip tells you the wall size On the internal side of the wall click the right mouse button as you can see in the image and select command Move The Application now asks you to specify the first starting point of t
188. if you have saved some views when opening the navigation window the Application will use the first view point in the list as default position for navigation Change Field of View While navigating the object it might be useful to change the field of view It is the same effect that you get in a camera by opening closing the camera lens It might be useful to change the FOV especially when you have very small rooms You can change the FOV clicking the Field of View button in the Navigation group of the Ribbon Set background on wo If your project contains windows or holes always important when rendering the scene as the sun light is a crucial Background Component for a wonderful rendering image it may be useful to let customers seeing a real image of the outside For this purpose you can open the navigation window move the point of view so that you can see the window and the outside click the Background button available in the Navigation group of the Ribbon and choose a background panoramic image Once you click one of the available backgrounds you 0 ProganmeaicadDonssreaeau einer can immediately see the image outside the window move the slider in order to rotate the ic_iwidds a background as you need Backgrounds in fact usually are panoramic images that allow you gt das erie seeing 360 views You can find some backgrounds right after installation or download new 86 _104 dds ones from the Catalogue section in the Live pag
189. ification only if you are sure about it or in case you are being guided by the support team for those who have joined technical support service Remember that non coherent modifications of System variables may lead the software to unstable situations If you want to modify an existing value click over the name of the variable change the value in the right field and click Apply If you want to delete a registry variable select it in the list and click Delete button Events General Measures Layout Navigation and Rendering Hardware key System Variables Events Logged events f j Info Navigation options quality 2 alpha on reflections off shaders off shadows off aa off aaquality 0 A Info Ogre Render System initialized Hardware acceleration on Info OGRE Render System Direct3D9 Rendering Subsystem Device Monitor 1 NVIDIA GeForce GT 330 Error in file CNavWin cpp line 6099 Info Spaceball not found Info StartOGRENavigation 435ms Error in file DBFILESCLR cpp line 128 Info Cannot detach database Info hasp login counter log Info Feature ID 0 11 times Info Feature ID 1000 1 times Info Feature ID 1011 5 times domus3d 14 0 build 511 File created Fri Jan 31 12 44 39 2014 Info Interfaces loaded Oms Info System ANSI code page 1252 Selected Language ENG Info Resource language loaded 623ms lt Locate application on disk This section li
190. ify it You can also ask the Application to set that width to all walls of the project by enabling the related check button If you want to change walls height right click again on the internal side of the wall you want to change and select command Height In this case if the check called Apply to all walls of the room is enabled you can specify one height only which will be the new height of all walls in the project If you disable that check you are now referring just to the selected wall where you can specify different height values for the right and left corner fnew Differently from previous versions Pegasus does not delete anymore the tiles you already placed on the walls prior the height modification Columns With this command you can create an external internal column inside an existing wall Move the cursor on the internal side of the wall you want to create the niche in then right click the cursor over it and select command Create column Still keeping the mouse over the internal part of the wall specify where you want the niche to start you can use left mouse button to rapidly set the starting point or type the distance of the niche from the left right corner of the wall you can switch from one to the other typing fields with the keyboard button and press Enter Then specify the size of the niche again you can quickly do it with the left mouse button or typing the exact and accurate size you want for the niche Fina
191. ight 98 Placing doors and windows 40 59 Placing objects in layout 40 61 point of view 57 Polyline 47 Polyline from selection 47 Portal lights 102 Print blueprint for the installer 150 floor walls b for the installer 152 project summary 153 projects details 150 properties 60 Properties 24 punctual light 99 Q Quick Step Guide 11 39 Rectangular Room 45 Reflection 105 Reflection Color 111 118 Reflection glossiness 106 Reflection Glossiness 113 118 Reflection Map 105 Refraction 107 Refraction color 107 112 Refraction Glossiness 113 Refraction Map 108 Refresh 54 Render Manager 140 Rendering 27 81 using mental ray 121 Rendering Parameters 88 rendering process in QuickStepGuide 43 Resize 65 roof 50 Room by selection 47 Rotate 64 80 Rughness 104 S Sample Project 11 12 39 44 177 184 191 Doors and windows 179 layout 178 Placing objects 180 Rendering with V Ray 189 Tile the floor 183 Tile walls 184 Virtual navigation 181 Saturation 85 97 Save room in components 47 Scale 93 Setup 11 12 158 Share single panorama 155 tiles catalogues on iPad 169 Shift 115 shortcuts 22 Shortcuts 52 shower box 76 179 185 186 190 single tile 75 SketchUp 160 Sloping 50 Snaps 53 Soft shadows 94 Soft Shadows 100 SpaceNavigator 56 Split 51 Spot Light 100 Stretch 65 strip 73 76 strips 73 74 Subdividing 51 Subdivs 102
192. ight multiplier 1 00 _ pm E D DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 86 Chapter 5 Rendering O a Color Mapping type Exponential dark multiplier 1 00 bright multiplier 1 00 pm p Next images refer to color chromatic adjustment examples using both Color Mapping typologies Image is dark in order to enhance differences you have by changing Dark and Bright multipliers Linear Exponential 1 Color Mapping Color Mapping ivpe Linear ivpe Exponential dark mulher 1 00 dark mulher 1 00 bright mubpher 1 00 bright mubpher 1 00 Color Mapping Color Mapping ivpe Linear ipe Exponential dark mumier 2 0 dark mudipber 2 0 bright mabp sr 1 00 nghi mubp sr 1 00 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 87 CHor Mapping tyre Linear dark multipber 4 00 bright mubpher 1 00 CHor Mapping type Linear dark mulher 1 00 baght mubpeer 2 00 Color Mapping type Linear dork multiplier 1 00 bright mubpeer 4 00 Color Mapping tyre dark mulipber bright mubpber CHor Mapping Exponential a0 1 00 tyre Exponenbal dark mulipier 1 0 bngt mubpher 2 00 Color Mapping type Exponential dork multiplier 1 00 bright mubpser 4 00 Chapter 5 Rendering Close button allows you to close this preview mask saving the setup you have just found As you ll be back in the Rendering Parameters mask you can start the r
193. in the previos versions When placing the Velux the Application links it and refers its distance to the default wall but using P keyboard button you can change the reference wall If you move the wall the Velux is linked to the window will be moved as well Change tile While in Navigation window if you want to quicker change existing tiles you can right click on the tile you want to change As you can see in this image you have 2 options for changing the tile Single will change just the selected tile Multiple will allow you to Wall select more tiles prior changing them with the new one TEE Restore neutral tile Highlight replaceable formats Tile material Data New strip Strip height Delete strip Move strip up Move strip down Modify strip origin Change Grout DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 203 Appendix Components window It has been improved the SEARCH engine in order to quicker search and find items in the internal Library PROJECTS ROOMS In the Tiles section you have the opportunity of searching tiles by color The internal search engine automatically ranks the tiles you have in the library with a color 16 or 256 base colors scheme so that it is easy and quick to work with specific colors n h i z A D a ELS PAN NISHING ELEMENTS Import TilePlanner projects DomuS3D users can import project made with TilePlanner the online design tool available connecting to www tileplanner
194. indow is currently opened some of the controls available in the Navigation and Rendering Tab may be disabled HOME DATABASE Recent documents Print Import Export TEN External documents LN b Send Z Menu F s Options Close application Get to the Navigation and Rendering Tab and choose the needed engine DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 81 Chapter 5 Rendering General Measures Layout Navigation and Rendering Hardware key System Variables Events Rendering Standard Navigation Advanced mental ray Interactive elements C Antialiasing Advanced V Ray _ Wireframe navigation Transparency Predefined Views Animation Reflections Advanced Show external walls Grouts 1024 v Panorama image size _ Underline grouts Locate application on disk If the navigation window is currently opened some of the controls available in the Navigation and Rendering Tab may be disabled Comparison between mental ray and V Ray This comparison refers only to the engines included in DomuS3D it is not a generic comparison Feature description mental ray V Ray Bump mapping w Reflection maps Y Refraction maps w Displacement maps a LRS RSJ Uses CPU E Available in render manager D E a aa Automatic exposure algorithm Real Time rendering Distributed rendering lt lt DomuS3D Pegasus User Gui
195. ion 0 90 Azimuth 180 180 Daytime preset Fields called Activate and Active allow you to enable disable the photometric light they refer to We suggest you to disable those lights only if you have really closed rooms without any hole in the walls any window or opened door in this case in fact they would not affect the rendering as there is no space where to get inside the room but they d still force the application to consider them while running the rendering engine which makes you waiting a longer time Anyway 100 closed rooms are very unusual hence we do strongly suggest you to use these lights remember to enable them and to provide them ways to get inside windows are ok doors are ok if they are opened Sometimes you can even hole the wall just for rendering purposes allowing the engine to use the sky sun light effect you ll see how warmer it is instead of artificial lights Even items surfaces combined with materials we ll see them later on this book give more realistic results if twinned with photometric lights That s why it is very common for graphic designers to create a hole in the room place it in one of the walls you ll not see in the rendering and even if you already have doors and windows so that you will enhance the effect made by the diffuse photometric light In these images you can see different parameters setup using photometric lights In some cases sky lig
196. ion mask go the second tab Keyboard and find the command you want to refer to Gi If the command already has an assigned shortcut you will see it in the Key assignments T oe field in this image you can see Ctrl N which is the default shortcut in order to create a Ctrl N E a y Undo rt F Open Create m room Gaf Projects Load project Save project new project Save proje You can remove it and create a new one click the left mouse button in the Press new peapa Press new shortcut key shortcut key field in order to enable it then use the keyboard to specify new E combination finally click the Assign button The shortcut is now ready to operate for you If you specified a shortcut already used by another command the new one will overwrite the former one We suggest you practising with shortcuts as they can dramatically increase your speed while planning there are in fact many commands you always use in your daily activity They re always the same so for those commands it is very useful to use keyboard combinations rather than searching them with your mouse this will let you save some more time The most important of them is Ctrl S as it allows you to save the current project in a fragment of a second As you now it is important to save the project time to time in order to avoid any project leak in case of PC malfunctions Reset All Please notice that the Language button all
197. irectly related to refraction in fact refraction must be enabled for this effect to be visible In the next images the object has been illuminated from the back side by a photometric light which is also the only light in the scene Here is the list of the material effects Main Parameters Diffuse Color E 229 0 0 Roughness 0 Reflection Reflection Color IE 0 0 0 Reflection Glossines 100 Glossiness Quality 3 Fresnel reflections Fresnel IOR 1 60 Refraction Refraction Color 191 191 191 Refraction Glossines 99 Glossiness Quality 16 Index of refraction K 1 60 Fog Color E 214 181 114 Fog Multiplier 0 25 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 112 Chapter 5 Rendering Traslucency Traslucency As you can see by activating Translucency it is like if the object is illuminated from inside In order to obtain good Translucency results you also need to adjust Refraction Glossiness as it helps the material being more or less polished We suggest you to use values in between 10 and 50 Refraction Glossiness 100 Refraction Glossiness 60 Refraction Glossiness 10 One more variable involved in Translucency is Fog color as it helps defining both the colors of the material and of translucency depending on the refraction intensity Indeed if material isn t totally transparent color is partially defined by the Diffuse Color If you change Fog multiplier translucency is less or more saturated so that you ca
198. is related to the strength of the fog effect Smaller values reduce the effect of the fog making the material more transparent Larger values increase the fog effect making the material more opaque In more precise terms this is the inverse of the distance at which a ray inside the object is attenuated with an amount equal to the Fog color In the previous examples Fog Multiplier was fixed and 1 0 In the following ones you can see a different Multiplier while Fog Color is fixed and set to blue uote Fog Multiplier k f Fog Multiplier 2 00 Fog Multiplier Values less than 1 reduce Fog color intensity while more than 1 increase it DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 111 Chapter 5 Rendering In the next example you can realize that the best result in order to color a glass is achieved by using Fog color instead of Refraction color j 7 eee Refraction Color fi 48 143 113 Refraction Color _ 255 255 255 Fog Color __ 255 255 255 Fog Color BR 48 143 113 By activating Affect Shadows you will cause the material to cast transparent shadows depending on the refraction color and the fog color This only works with V Ray shadows and lights Refraction color affects shadow color as well as intensity Affect Shadows l Affect Shadows If you activate Translucency also called sub surface scattering you can simulate those materials that diffuse light even inside themselves Translucency calculation is d
199. is section of the Options console allows you to decide the way you want to trace the walls of the blueprint colors internal walls filler standard width and height of the walls it will be possible to change them later on In the Lights group it is possible to choose whether or not to view the lights in the layout through a graphic representation and set the standard height to use any time you create a new light it will be possible to change it later on N avigation and Renderin General Measures Layout Navigation and Rendering Hardware key System Variables Events Rendering Standard Navigation Advanced mental ray Interactive elements jaliasi Advanced V Ray Wireframe navigation Advanced Predefined Views Animation Show external walls Grouts 1024 wv Panorama image size _ Underline grouts Locate application on disk O Navigation This is the panel where to configure the appearance and quality of the 3D window also called navigation window Among the most important component is the Quality slider Moving it to High will mean a better image of the project to be seen while in 3D view We suggest you to check the different levels comparing the related images you can see in 3D considering that the higher the quality you will use the slower the computer will be in order to display the scene depending on the computer s power BE CAREFUL we suggest you to use the better higher qualit
200. it diffuse lighting as you can see in this image Lights management Lights and illumination are so important when you record a movie in real life the same importance have lights when you render images of your projects In this section of the manual we ll see tips and tricks regarding the way of using lights the features they have how their properties reflect to the rendered image Natural light sun light This light is available just within the advanced rendering engine It allows you to simulate sun light creating images shot in the morning afternoon evening noon This is possible thanks to a couple of photometric lights Sun light you really place the sun in the scene somewhere Sky light indirect diffused light you have tanks to the presence of the atmosphere Even if you can enable those components one at a time our suggestion is to combine them both in order to have a more realistic light in the room Inside the Virtual 3d ribbon group of Layout window select the command Lights gt Natural light You will open OQ f the following mask containing all effects regarding those lights Natural Lights light management Lights DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 124 Chapter 5 Rendering Sun light Activate Multiplier 0 1 10 0 50 Shadow softness 1 00 Soft shadow quali 8 Photons 1 000 1 100000 Sky Activate Multiplier 0 1 10 1 00 Horizon height 1 0 00 Horizon blur 0 10 0 10 Elevat
201. ith the unit measure you formerly selected i erae Kener in the Application preferences If you do not remember it look at the status bar bottom right side of the Application window Change the origin starting point of the pattern In case the standard alignment of the tiles is not the one new you want the Application starts tiling from the first corner of the layout you designed you can change it In the Navigation window click the right mouse button on the floor and select command Modify tiling position As you can see in the image below the Application gives you a graphic representation of the current origin it is the yellow sphere and the red arrow starting from it gives you the idea of the direction the tiling procedure goes through You can move the mouse in order to re place the origin The new origin is represented by the green sphere you can snap it to current tiling for example the tiles on the wall objects and walls When you have found the new origin click the left mouse button in order to set it you will see that the floor coverings will move starting from the new origin Live xX Layout Dinal x DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 70 Tile material Data New strip Strip height Delete strip Move strip up Move strip down Modify strip origin Floor Change tile Restore neutral tile Highlight replaceable formats Tile material Data New strip Strip height Delete strip Move stri
202. l open the Playlist panel rbe 45053 46053 muct be apened on poecpincoraticnd local fire be mwlHHe b eter drents Cits Assign a name to the Playlist select the part s of your catalogue you want to add to the playlist and click the button In a few seconds the Application will calculate the size of the Playlist this is an important info to know especially when sharing the catalogue with the iPad visualizer as the iPad may have limited free space on disk Create even more Playlists and save them you will not loose disk space on the Application s computer as the Playlist is just a reference to existing catalogues Finally start the service from your computer by clicking the play gt button also check that the given port is available and open for DomuS3D Ask your IT manager about it in case of malfunctions You re now ready to open the visualizer and synchronize the extended catalogues on it In the next paragraph we will see how to synchronize the iPad TouchFly visualizer Synchronize a Playlist on your iPad Download the free App TouchFly from the Maticad area of the AppStore and install it on your iPad check that the iPad is connected in WiFi to the same Local Area Network LAN where the PC with the Playlist is available Finally check that the service on the PC is running ref previous paragraph As you open the App you find the following welcome page Domus3 D ouc Tap here 1o coarect 39 a Dor Tap
203. l or objects corners as the Delta destination point of the object Advanced Probably the most used is the Point delta as it allows you to select a reference point and specify Continue the offset you want to locate the object to S75 We suggest you practicing with these options note that the status bar usually tells you what the Application is waiting for That s a good suggestion for you in order to understand what to do next Near DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 61 Chapter 3 Elements Placing objects in navigation window Placing objects in the layout window allows you to be as accurate as you need But if accuracy is not your target and you take care more of speed and show especially when designing together with your customer it is amazing to place 3D objects in the scene within the Navigation window Pick up the object from the component window and drag it in the Navigation window release the left mouse button when you are in the scene You can now move the object all around the room and you can notice the as soon as you approach a wall the object automatically rotates and aligns itself to that wall If you click again the left mouse button the object will drop in the position the mouse currently is if the object is aligned to the wall you will see the double measure controls that allow you specifying the exact distance between the object and the left right corner Same concept as in the layout as usual use keyboard bu
204. l see now a list of available windows to choose from Place the window the same way you did for the door finally double click the window and set following properties DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 179 The Sample Project Let s save project by selecting the button on top of the Ribbon ia or clicking the keyboard buttons IE Placing objects 3 Let s place the furnishing elements a Again in the FURNISHING ELEMENTS section of the Components window search for BATHROOM level WC level and choose an item of your choice Note as you ll get deeper with the internal and downloaded libraries you can also use the Search field in order to quicker find the item you want to work with b As soon as you have chosen the toilet you want to use drag amp drop it in the project the same way you did for the door and window c When you move the object in the layout you can even release the mouse note that the object automatically aligns to the wall you re siding with the mouse as soon as the mouse pointer stands over the internal wall d Ifyou drop the object clicking the left mouse button the element s position may not be so accurate that s why we prefer align the object to the wall with the mouse then leave the mouse and type the distance between the object and the corner Type 45 and click Enter or press 5 keyboard button to switch to the other distance If you have misplaced the object click the right mouse button ov
205. l show you just the layer called Class in the Application you are currently selecting Try selecting a different class and see how the object preview changes consequently The list on the right side of the mask tells you which material has been assigned to the selected DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 66 Chapter 3 Elements layer By clicking the Material button you can modify this material the effects for example or load a new one and assign it to the layer Indeed this is not the easiest way to assign a material in the next paragraph you will see a quicker way of assigning materials to object classes Assign new from components window The quickest way to assign a new material to an existing object is to drag and drop it from the Components window Open the Navigation window and move the point of view so that you can see the object you re going to modify Then open the Materials section in the Components window find out the material you want to apply select it drag and drop it over the object Do not release the mouse for a while when you re on the object try moving the mouse over the object If the object has more layers the Application highlights the layer you re over As you can see in the next images a yellow color tells you about the currently selected layer When you are on the desired layer release the left mouse button to definitively drop the material Do it as many times as you want even on the same layers Note this i
206. later on DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 140 Chapter 5 Rendering How to use Render Manager Once you have installed R M the first time you use it you will be asked to specify the folder where to pick up the rendering jobs You can change the location even later on so this is not a final choice In the following image you can see the Render Manager application while it is working Eie pende Wa Help pono amo b Olobe i I Eathrocen el reir a el rary Pare i nT ts ee n a i ae m F a J 4 F 7 r Rendertitchen A 3 5 Prepais 1 of 3 BEN CPadena Soggy Wet 72 kgia Bee A this section contains the rendering jobs still to be processed on queue B this section contains the rendered jobs and the one currently being processed C this section allows you to change rendering priority order D by clicking this button you can change the folder from where to pick up the rendering jobs E this section provides you some information about the size of the image to be rendered and the time of current rendering F here you can see the image while being created by the engine The B section as said before contains the list of all the rendered jobs and the one currently being processed The red cross symbol Bathroom job relates to rendering jobs that have been interrupted by user or Bathroom encountered a technical problem and have not been completed E Renderkitchen The green
207. launch rendering process outside DomuS3D In this way your Application will remain ready and available in order to keep on working and designing projects while the rendering effort will be directed to the Render Manager itself Render Manager can be installed in 2 different ways On the same computer where DomuS3D is in this case Render Manager license is free if you have a DomuS3D Professional or Enterprise version as it uses the same hardware protection key of the Application Your Application indeed will be slower depending on the cores you assigne to the R M as part of the computer resources will be used by the R M On a different computer so called Render Server in this case you need to purchase a dedicated license for the R M and you will receive a second hardware protection key to be placed on the Render Server The R M setup procedure is available on the same DVD of the Application by clicking the nstall Render Manager button Render Manager application is available both for 32 and 64 bits N O Preinstalled programs Domus3p Antares Install TouchFly Backup Restore Install Render Manager cra Browse DVD DomuS3D Install Render Slave SafeNet EXIT Install Render Slave allows you to install the atom for activating distributed rendering available only with V Ray R M is able to render both with mental ray and V Ray and can be used both with Pegasus and Antare
208. led the rendered image will be illuminated by the sky only which is an indirect illumination coming from the outside We suggest you to disable the sun light only in case of an indoor room without any hole window in this situation in fact sun light will never enter the room and affect the image but it will keep slowing down the rendering process as the engine will have to consider it too even if useless For this purpose select the button Night time pre set that sets up the needed effects for you Indeed we warmly encourage you using the sun light as it enhances tiles and objects materials and surfaces so that the final image will be better rather than if illuminated by artificial lights only Sometimes well very often for medium and small rooms it is also possible not to place any artificial light as the sun light will be enough Keep in mind that expert designers are used to create temporary hole s in some walls which are not visible in the rendering just in order to let the sun light entering the scene and make the illumination Indeed if the room already contains a window or an opened door you do not have to create any additional hole as the sun light will enter the room and overcome the sky light Multiplier 0 1 10 this parameter gives you the idea of the light intensity Default value is 1 You can change this parameter in case you want to reduce increase the sun light power Try to change it slightly and launch a small render
209. les number The Application will let you specify the number of tiles you want to have in that strip and as soon as you change the value you ll see the result in the wall in the background Save dynamic panel In case you want to save the dynamic panel in the internal library you can click the button you see in the left image the one with the red square around it tool tipped with Save as panel in the a3 IM a sae Application By doing this you will find the panel in the Components window so that next time Lie Ne you need to tile the same way you just need to get to the panels section and drag amp drop it to the walls This will lead you to the same laying situation saving a lot of clicks time Be careful of typing the correct information while saving the panel as they will be important when searching the panel you want need in the Components window ea DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 73 Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials Move strips up down In case you mislaid the strips on the wall you can change their order directly from within the Navigation window Click the right mouse button on the strip you want to move and select command Move strip up down This is a useful option in order to change strips order once the wall has been completed In the next image you can see that we have easily switched the decors by using these commands several times since we ve found the correct solution DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide
210. list is complete the home page opens on the synchronized catalogue at the top center of the screen the 2 buttons allow you to switch from the tile to the 3d Elements view In the next image you can see the Tiles view DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 171 Chapter 8 TouchFly In the next image you can see the 3D objects also called Furnishing elements view M A G G a A A O O E H D peee Tap the purple filter button in order to select the Manufacturer you want to focus on if you click the arrow on the right position of the cell you can refine your selection also by collection and format Manufacturer capri gt GLOSSY CARAMEL GLOSSY LIGHT GLOSSY LILLA GLOSSY SAND MANLFATTURP gt E RAMICH i MARCA CORONA 1741 m INSERTO PLAY CARAMEL MATITA GLOSSY BLUE MATITA GLOSSY BORDE MATITA GLOSSY CARAM INSERTO MATISSE CAA USTELLO MATISSE BLUE LISTELLO MATISSE BOR LISTELLO MATISSE CAR meme If you tap the home button all filters will be cleared and you will see all the catalogue again As soon as you tap an item in the list a pop up will appear showing you most relevant details such as item code description collection name format price if any in the DomuS3D database together with the item image preview Add to Basket 1 GLOSSY BLUE 10406951 0 CAPRI jiii GLOSSY 560x200 mm CAPRI MISHTO Pss oc i ats PELLO ness CAR Dwtade
211. ll get back to the project layout where you can move the object and place it in the final destination DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 63 Chapter 3 Elements Modification Move There are several ways to move an existing object also depending on the window you are working in Let s start from the Layout window Select the object by clicking the left mouse button inside it you can see that the object is highlighted and marked with blue balls see next image If you click again inside it with the left mouse button you can start moving it all around the layout Click again the left button to drop it in the new position Note that while moving you can type in the offset and the angle and press return when finished in case you want to get rid of the mouse and provide a more accurate information Also if you want to fix the movement of the object vertically or horizontally press o keyboard button as you may recall from the Layout chapter while drawing or moving o button allows you to enable disable orthogonal mood A second way of moving objects while in layout is by clicking the right mouse button over one of the object lines and select the command Move In this case you enter the same Move mood you already saw when dragging the object from the library If you are in the Navigation window you can move objects by clicking the right mouse button over the visible objects any part of them and select command Move If y
212. ll see that the Application will highlight in a Aions light and pale yellow the surface you are moving the mouse ca Fed mE over Drop the tile just when you are over the needed a surface You ll see that face covered with the tile you Destination Surtece B gt Aige tet selected The same process can be done with dynamic patterns too in case you want to apply multiple formats patterns g OF cH o G0 a SIDENTITILER E None v AMBITION COLOR RWARL ROOMS PROJECTS v Ambition Creme Rom Ambition Gold Mesai 4 Pe zZ 2 z Fe rot f y Z 2 Z a 2 2 lt g S z gt a ed 2 a v 2 z 9 8 Change the existing grout colour What about if you have not been paying attention to the grout color when you tiled floor and walls You can change the grout color even later on in 2 different ways First option is to open the Materials section of the Components window while navigating the room select the Color typology and choose the color you want to assign to the grout As seen in the previous paragraph drag amp drop the colored material to the surface the tiling refers to it will highlight in order to let you realize the destination before releasing dropping The Application will then ask you if you want to apply that color just to the section you have selected Wall strip tiles to all the similar strips in the other walls of the room Room st
213. lly tell the Application if you want the niche to be inside or outside the room the mouse direction will be the reference in order to understand if it is in or out Same as before left click the mouse button if you want to be quick or type the internal external extension you want to refer to DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 49 Chapter 1 Layout Holes Niches With this command you can create holes in any position of the wall ATTENTION you do not have to do create holes prior placing a window as windows already make an automatic hole in the wall even when you move them later on So use this command only if you want the wall to have a real architectural hole in it or if you want to create a niche as we ll see in a few moments Move the cursor on the internal side of the wall you want to create the niche in then right click the cursor over it and select command Create hole niche The Hole niche properties mask will appear so that you can specify any details of the hole niche such as size and elevation Not all the mask controls are enabled those who are not refer to windows and doors properties You will find them enabled when you will open doors windows properties Note the Niche group of commands in the next image on the left if Activate check button is unchecked this means that you re going to create a hole in the wall you will really see outside the room and sun light will enter the room while in Navigation and or R
214. lse in the Application desktop click the FURNISHING ELEMENTS panel You can browse the library by selecting the related Macro Typology Architectural the Typology Doors or Dynamic Doors finally the Manufacturer you want to refer to Now you should have a list of doors available in the preview section of the component Keep pressed the left mouse button on the preview image and drag the door in the layout window now that you are 170 0 over the project you can release the left button l e0 F YI E Now can see that while moving the mouse you ll move the es oer ee eee eee a ee door too it is the red rectangle linked to the mouse cursor You cannot leave the door in the middle of the room so try placing the mouse cursor over the internal walls of the project you ll notice that the door automatically rotates and aligns to the wall and becomes green this is the confirmation that you can now locate it Now that the door knows the destination wall it becomes green and a double measure control shows up giving you the distance between the door and the left right corner of the wall In order to definitively release the door you can click again the left button if the position is correct but if you want to be even more accurate leave the mouse where it is in order to specify the destination wall and start typing the distance you want to refer to In the image above you can see that the selected distance to refer to is the one between t
215. lso you can move the mouse over one of the and as soon as you see the Download Arrow click the left mouse button in order to confirm immediate download In this way the element will be immediately downloaded and installed in your library This is a useful option in case you urgently need to download just a few items and you do not want to get complete typologies or collections Quick Step Guide Part 2 Quick Step Guide Why a Quick Step Guide This part of the User guide is meant for those who do not have time to immediately read the all manual but would like to create their first project by now Quick Step Guide combines the most important paragraphs you will find in the next Chapters you may also read Sample Project in Part 4 which is a step by step guide to create a project Even if you start reading this part we strongly encourage you to keep on reading the rest of the guide too as you will find detailed and extended information that are essential in the Application daily use Create a new project By using existing room templates 4 From Chapter 1 If you need to create a project and you already have a similar layout shape l available in the room templates you can use it and create a project in just 1 click E o Why do we say a similar layout Because if you need let s say a rectangular room you can use the square template and modify the room size very easily right after So don t be afra
216. ly preset or custom materials Preset materials button allows you to select see image on the right one of the available finishings and borders among those available in the application database it is also possible to have a preview of the rendered material applied to such item Text information on the left gives you a summary about the tile its format the format given to the border which also depends on the original size in pixels of the tile itself If such image is not large enough talking about pixels li t code Dearga AZUL MACAUIBAS Cobecbon MARELE wheaght og whith ion liga babe Keshri trend OH ei paaened Chapter 5 Rendering Supi Lope Senet descapticn MARELE Hiaherg Li CERAMIC GOTH Comportion ro comp In production Pack Dipa ia i 1 Sl 1 Formal eee F imirt Rendon M sen Price norssi clade you could be alerted by the system about this problem as the application could not be ready to smooth the original tile image in order to create the border In this case increase dimension of the border tile image too big or change the image tile and make it bigger if it s too small Custom materials button allows you to create a customized material to apply over the surface of the tile You will get to the same mask you already saw regarding materials previously in this manual except for diffuse mapping which is enabled as it refers to the tile image Material para
217. m from the standard ones you downloaded from Maticad Cloud Share and Visualize the extended libraries on the iPAD If you want to be able to browse the extended catalogues in your iPAD e g while walking together with the customer in the Showroom or even getting out to the customer s premises you can install the free iPAD App and synchronize the DomuS3D extended catalogue on it In this way you will always carry with you images prices items details and even the projects you made for him her as the 360 panoramas will allow you to let the customer seeing your projects Share and Visualize the extended libraries on Touch Screens in my Showroom If you want to browse the extended catalogues on other PC s of your showroom even without DomuS3D installed even on touch screens you can install the TouchFly visualizer for PC Windows 7 or later and synchronize it with your Application You will soon learn how to synchronize the TF visualizer DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 165 Chapter 8 TouchFly Create multi room panoramas TouchFly editor also allows you to create interlaced panoramas where you can link several 360 Panoramas each other Moreover you can add items information as JPG images by placing hotspots on the material so that you can point and click the hotspot and open the material technical detail Using the Editor How to customize extend an existing catalogue ie In the Home section of the Ribbon select
218. mera situated outside the room you can render the interior of the room Yet the external light sunlight passes through the generated opening modifying the room light balance To achieve the same result without the external light enters proceed as follows make sure that there are no tiles laid on the wall you need to hide possibly eliminate installation apply material to an interior wall with this parameter enabled hide the outer wall only the outer click the Right Mouse button on the outer wall and then select the Hide command on the pop up menu that appears Transparency propagates Alpha saves object transparence settings over the Alpha cannel of the image FG GI Multiplier Allows tweaking of how strongly the material responds to indirect light FG Quality is a multiplier referred to the number of Final Gather rays emitted by the material Additional color with this option you can decide that the material will be able to emit light by itself specifying which color you want it to emit Highlight Refl Balance 100 by default allows you to balance the effect of light reflection over the surface Sometimes in fact lights can be so strong to burn objects or create very bright areas decreasing such parameter will let you reduce such effect Let s go back now talking about the mask containing all materials available and loaded in the project Materials Modify VETRO Intonaco_bianc VetroMobile DOUSSIE_O AC
219. meters Parameters Name Model Lambert Type Basic TTT Ambient level 30 Preset Typology Livello Riflessione 0 Transparency level 0 Maps Diffuse Map Texture Activate File MATICADSFIORANONR Scale 250 00 Reflection Map Bump Map Cum DL Date Diui WT feeder pia bed Bordatuafucals lael Tike ara BAA x 335 mem 413 x OAA piho Dorder size PE ERT Curved birder bo antre collection Delete button allows of course deleting the material previously applied to the tile itself Apply to entire collection button can be useful in case finishing material can be applied to the rest of the tiles in the same collection This is the situation where you do not have a peculiar bump image but you can provide an effect all over the surface of the tile In this case it is useful to work on 1 tile only then to replicate the same material to the remaining tiles in the collection Once the tile has been saved with the new material and used within a project you can modify the project tile material working in the Modify tiling by selecting command Modify gt Tile gt Modify material which will lead you through the well known mask related to Material parameters DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 139 Chapter 5 Rendering Render Manager License Render Manager also R M later on in this paragraph is a DomuS3D companion application that can be used in order to
220. n and refraction And last but not least even speed up the rendering process When you choose V Ray engine in the DomuS3D Preferences Options prior creating a project you are switching materials section to use VRayMtl materials in a few moments you will see that thanks to VRayMtl materials you can simulate and control most of the natural effects that you want to reproduce in your scene Before proceeding have a look at the materials already available in the library Components window on the left pane and especially the difference between wood marble glass metal etc Let s try to create your first material for V Ray in the Ribbon click the Database section go to the Element materials section and select the command New You can also double click an existing material in the Components window in order to modify an existing one do this just in case you know what you want to do as modification will be permanent in the database library DATABASE F 225 Import Export v ae n a gt a iais 2 Packages a m oug 5 5 9 Panels MOSAICS Elements Import Elements Import amp Print agement X management Export material Export Panels MOSAICS Furnishing elements Layout Provide customer name X You are now entering the mask where to decide the features of the new material once completed the setup by clicking OK you will save the material in the internal database and you will find it in the Materials com
221. n designed using 3DFaces and not Blocks At the moment of writing the allowed formats are DXF 3ds DAE Once you have downloaded and saved locally the 3D file go to the Ribbon get to the DATABASE section and in the Furnishing elements group select the command Elements management New Fill in the item details such as item code description etc Click the mport button in order to load the external 3D file and assign it to the new element Once you confirm the creation procedure you should see the new element in the Components window If you need to modify it again double click on it in order to open again the item properties mask Note click the Modify button if you want to see the objects in 3D Such a visualization also allows you to check the layers of the object and assign materials to each layer select the layer you want to refer to click Material button in order to choose the effect you want to assign to that layer and confirm by clicking the Set button If layer names are in a different language than yours click Show Selected class button so that the 3D representation of the object will let you see just the currently selected layer DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 160 Chapter 7 Database Group existing objects in a single item in library Sometimes it can be useful to group more items in a single one so that next time you ll save time dragging amp dropping one object instead of many You can create your own group and cod
222. n is pjp automatically opens the program loading the selected project BE CAREFUL it is strongly recommended to decide the way you want to work with project files right after program installation We discourage switching this check on and off later on as it would be difficult to remember whether the project you are interested in is located in the internal database or in the computer network file system O View dynamic tips Tooltips Enables disables the display of short messages when the mouse cursor touches sensitive areas such as commands and design elements e g walls O Text buttons You can customize the text and dimensions font their size and colour O Perimeter Tiling continuous When this option is enabled the application tries to keep on using the remaining part of tile cut in the previous corner instead of starting the new wall with a complete tile image on the left This gives continuity to the covering procedure you can see it on the right image O WordML Editor The application lets you having a preview of many technical printouts in a dedicated window If you have Microsoft Word installed on your computer you can decide to use it within the program in order to preview the printout If you don t have such a software check the Internal option so that the application will use an internal editor for previewing the printouts In both cases indeed you will be able to customize the final printout the same way yo
223. n make the color of the material clearer or darker In the next images we have set the material a Reflection Glossiness 30 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 113 Chapter 5 Rendering Fog Multiplier i Fog Multiplier f Fog Multiplier 0 10 By changing Translucency multiplier it is possible to multiply the intensity of the light being diffused from within the object without any modification of the light itself Traslucency Multiplier 0 00 Traslucency Multiplier 2 50 Traslucency Multiplier 10 00 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 114 Chapter 5 Rendering Bump Maps Bump Maps group allows you to assign an image called bump usually grey scale based that gives the material some roughness rugosity Bright areas will emboss emphasize that part of the surface dark areas will dig the material giving the impression of a cavity on the surface As you already know if you want to assign a bump you have to activate the bump field and browse for the file to be assigned to the material Multiplier allows you to adjust the intensity of the map Values greater than zero increase the high surfaces made by the white bright part of the map less than zero increase the groove effect made by the black dark If you type 0 bump will not be applied Flowers_bump jpg 5 00 Flowers_bump jpg J Flowers_bump jpg 0 00 Muttiph 1 00 Note that the bump map involves also the reflection intensity and if the material has some
224. n the Navigation window the Application will move the observer in the middle of the room by default the first point of view in case you formerly saved in the project one or more points of view From that position you can move by using the mouse buttons this way CoR If you keep the left mouse button pressed the observer remains in the same position in the layout but the eyes head will move depending on the direction you are moving the mouse in If you move it forward the observer will look at the ceiling If you move backward the observer will look at the floor If you move left right the observer will rotate left right If you get lost and can happen the very first time you practice don t worry click the N keyboard button in order to Normalize the view which is to say restore the view at the original inclination ok The right mouse button allows you to move walk inside the room change the position in the layout If you keep the right mouse button pressed and start moving the mouse you will proceed inside the room If you move it forward the observer will go ahead if you move backward the observer will step back If you move it right left observer will move laterally Central wheel button is used in order to move the observer higher lower In this way you can easily change the elevation of the eyes Try to practice a bit with the mouse and become expert in moving a good exercise is to get from one corner to the opposit
225. nd fee their behavior will let you improving more and more your images realism During the first steps in lights learning we also suggest you to use one single light at a time if possible so that it ll be easier for you to see the difference while changing properties and also in order to minimize the time you will need for the rendering Light diffused by doors and windows Portal light Doors and windows of the project can be light emitters as well as physical lights this is why they are called Portal light In case you have placed external lights sun and or sky those lights will be able to enter the room through doors and windows and really such lights are far more realistic than artificial lights You can enable disable such property which is enabled by default by double clicking the left mouse button over the door window or right clicking and then selecting properties in properties mask enable check called Emit diffuse lighting DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 130 Chapter 5 Rendering Measures Niche Elevation Width la 5 A 100 0 1 Eaciva E Distance Height Depth 150 150 0 10 0 Position Internal Centred External Threshold Frame Activate Activate Mounting Badge Width Prominence Width Width A B Prominence Prominence Width Width E D G Other properties i Right opening Show door opening OK Cancel Zasasl Managing materials textures and effects Materials for objects and fur
226. ng items to be installed on your computer Click Install to begin installing these requirements Status Requirement Pending Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express R2 In the first one setup will check if the operating system has all needed frameworks NET Bonjour database engine key drivers etc Frameworks are modules of the operating system needed by the Application in order to correctly operate E r sy DomuS3D Antares InstallShield Wizard H DomuS3D Antares InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for DomuS3D Antares COPYING OF THIS COMPUTER PROGRAM OR ITS DOCUMENTATION a EXCEPT AS PERMITTED BY THIS LICENCE IS COPYRIGHT E INFRINGEMENT UNDER THE LAWS OF YOUR COUNTRY IF YOU COPY THIS COMPUTER PROGRAM WITHOUT PERMISSION OF MATICAD YOU ARE VIOLATING THE LAW YOU MAY BE LIABLE TO MATICAD FOR DAMAGES AND YOU MAY BE SUBJECT TO CRIMINAL PENALTIES POSSESSION OR USE FOR COMMERCIAL PURPOSES OF ANY PROGRAM DEVICE OR OTHER MEANS INTENDED TO FACILITATE REMOVAL OR CIRCUMVENTION OF THE HARDWARE LOCK OR NODE TDCNTTETOATTOWN WOC ATTU wWereceu TUTO COMNTTEH NNArnNnaAaAwN The InstallShield R Wizard will install DomuS3D Antares on your computer To continue click Next WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties InstallShield
227. ng the double measure system if you don t see it it means that the mouse cursor is not over the internal side of the wall If you wan to exit the procedure click the keyboard button or even the right mouse button Finally let s talk about the difference between Doors and Dynamic Doors typology A dynamic door window is not a static object and can be opened closed by the designer while in navigation by clicking the left mouse button over the door window handle Keep in mind that usually windows are transparent hence sun light always passes through doors will not let it get in the scene if they are closed By opening them if they are dynamic will allow some sun light enter the room Doors and windows properties You can change the doors or windows properties anytime during your design process You will now learn how to access a door property panel double click with the left mouse button over one of the lines of the door in the layout window The image on the left shows you an example of a possible line where to double click A second method in order to access the properties mask is to click once the right mouse button over one of the lines of the door in the layout Materials window the image on the right shows you that the mouse has been clicked over the opened ra Delete big Properties door line As soon as you click the right mouse button a context menu appears with the commands related to the door Select the last
228. nishing elements Materials and textures hardwood metal marble etc can be very effective when correctly applied over the objects and furnishing elements layers they are as important as the lights we talked about in the previous section DomuS3D involves the use of materials such as ARCH amp DESIGN that is an advanced material that can provide realism to the scene You can use predefined setups in order to be able to quickly create new materials such as wood glass metal steel etc With such materials too you can use maps if you need Maps are not only images applied to a layer in order to represent the real material of the object which is a global feature They re also able to enhance the different parts of the object where you have different labor finishings surfaces etc such as Opacity polished levigated reflective Available maps are Diffuse map image applied as a texture to the object This is the main image that is the one referring to the type of material Roughness map bump map it is a grey scale image where you can find the areas of the material being rough Where bump is brighter it means you have emboss sections where the maximum will be given by a white pixel darker areas are areas where you have a sort of low relief Reflection map it is a grey scale image where you can find areas of the material being reflective Brighter areas are meant to be as reflective as you move towards white color
229. nitialize and recalculate Recalculate New record allows you to create a new item in the estimate also called non graphic item Such ae i o recor item will not be graphic as it does not come from the Components window e g could be some Delete record hardware for the kitchen units or electrical equipment that you do not see in the Navigation Resize columns window but still need to consider in the project estimate Modify record you can change some item details in the estimate Such a modification does not affect the item in the Application library but just the one available in the project Note you can also double click a record to access the modify record mask DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 145 Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share Delete record allows you to temporary delete an item from the estimate Consider that if you calculate the estimate again e g by clicking the Update button all graphic entities which are in the project will be calculated again and placed in the estimate despite the fact that you formerly deleted from the spreadsheet Recalculate the application calculates again the estimate considering all items that are in the project graphic items Initialize and recalculate the application deletes all estimate including non graphic items and calculates again the estimate With this feature you will loose non graphic items formerly manually placed Optimized or exact calculation The estimate can
230. ns while talking about the sun light see also related paragraph Here the same concept is applied to the artificial light you re considering Default value is 100 000 If you increase this value you ll get a more consistent light beam having a brighter scene together with homogeneous illumination of course you ll pay this quality waiting more time for the final rendering The application in fact needs to calculate path inside the project s scene and bounces for each of the photons of the light in order to 100 simulate real light spot penumbra this value is meant only for spot lights Allows you to configure a soft faint zone placed at the border of the bright light Percentage is meant referring to the angle you have specified for the spot light If you want indeed a soft light effect that s to say a light creating a soft shadow while encountering objects you do not have to specify No effect as this would make the light as a single point you have indeed to give a shape rectangular spherical cylinder to the light in the Soft Shadows section DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 129 Chapter 5 Rendering The following images will be able to show you the difference far more than the previous description a Sole Luce puntiforme l Oggetto Pi Oggetto a A Ombra Yl f J ff Ombra 4 ft E w o Ps f A 5 5 ie J A point light can Area lights can create generate just linear a
231. nsations needs and dreams for the future versions of the Application as well as for its documentation and siding technologies As we know the paramount importance of this process in order to give you a win win technology for your daily use we re already listening to you share your feedback and help us shape our roadmap for the next versions by writing comments and suggestions to wishlist domus3d com DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 207 Epilogue I m confident that this guide has helped you in starting working with DomuS3D in your very first approach the guide in fact at the current status does not claim to be the ULTIMATE guide for DomuS3D For those users who are becoming experts and want more from the learning side I d suggest as follows 1 Receive the up to date version of the guide New versions of the manual will be available quarterly and will be published in a the Application s Live Page as PDF file b the Application s web site as PDF file c asan App on Maticad s AppStore and GooglePlay d as an e book for Kindle 2 Look at the videos available both in the Application s Live Page and on YouTube channel http www youtube com channel UCBZt49BrNWSEEH9a4vkepiQ 3 Getin touch with the Support team for those who have subscribed technical support service in order to share your design problems with the DomuS3D experts Thank you for being valuable part of our Team Massimo Rossini DomuS3D Pegasus
232. nt 96 Estimate 145 available algorithms 146 export the XLS file 147 print the e 148 waste factor 147 existing room templates 39 Exponential 87 Exposure 83 84 Extend 65 FAQ 192 Field of View 57 floor 68 Fog color 111 112 113 Fog Multiplier 111 Free hand drawing 45 47 Fresnel 107 Fresnel IOR 107 Furnishing Elements 32 Glossiness 106 GPU 89 grout 70 79 Hardware key 28 height 49 73 Holes 50 How to open Navigation 41 54 IES 98 99 100 Images 33 insert 78 Installation procedure 16 Invisible 93 ISO 84 keyboard 48 55 Layings 31 Layout 27 45 shortcuts 52 Snaps 53 Length 115 Lights 32 Linear 87 Live 20 21 35 36 37 57 98 103 160 165 178 181 188 208 M Materials 32 66 already available in projects 120 mental ray 28 Artificial lights 127 bibliography 144 choose the engine 81 comparison with V Ray 82 Exposure control 121 how to use it 121 Lights 124 Materials 131 Natural light sun light 124 Portal light 130 Tiles materials 139 MetallicPaint 104 Mirror 66 Modify 66 Modular Furnishing 174 mouse 48 55 Move 64 Move walls 39 49 Multiplier 93 99 100 115 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 210 Navigate the scene 41 Navigation 27 54 neon 101 Niches 50 Night time 93 97 NVIDIA 89 objects 59 origin 70 76 Ozone 95 pattern 70 Pegasus news ref Antares 197 penumbra 99 Physical l
233. o information about the objects position and tiles sections This documentation will be very useful when sending information to the team who ll take care of setting up the room following your instructions Note if you do not see some information in your printout remember to go to the Options mask where you can decide what to hide and what to show in technical blueprints DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 151 Floor Walls blueprint for the installer Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share Similar to the previous one you can have all the needed information just in one sheet It is the Floor Walls Blueprint for the installer command TOOLS DATABASE Fig Export ay a Ey Print Paper Web Print Blueprint fo Floor Walls blueprint Fs Layout Layout the installe for the installer Layout Prin As you can see in this image you have all details about the floor and the walls together provided that the project s shape allows it DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 152 TOS ATLASI Bhe Crema Mart 0 Lappain TO RETT ONOGOD Grout DO em S576 0 ATLAd 7 RET 3015 Gout lem ACHI OAT Las Aretan Cirie Mesumces Dates FO ETT 3 50305 Gena 3 0m Print project summary Print project Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share You can also decide to use templates similar to the one you already saw in the Estimate section available through the Paper Layout command in order to print folders that contain multiple information on the As yo
234. obtain by activating the individual options un in oop F i n i in h RETT 25 0175 0 om DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 25 Initial operations and configurations settings Tiling origin dimensions the origins of tiled areas are indicated the symbol identifies the origin and tells the installer to proceed right to left while the symbol is referred to left to right direction and their size related to left or right corner This image shows you a wall containing a standard panel beneath divided in 2 sections usually called tiled areas later on in this manual identified by tiles numbered 5 The red arrows point the starting point of such areas Automatic dimensions by activating this option the technical laying printouts show the distance from the corner to the main snap point of any furnishing element near the wall In the previous image the blue arrows show that distance for the washbasin and the mirror Tile numbers in technical printouts by activating this option the typical wireframe based blueprint for the installer is completed with automatic tiles enumeration in order to be able to link the tiles data grid including details such item code format etc with the tiles available on the wall This setup is very useful for the installers but sometimes it is worth to disable it especially with mosaic as the size of the tile does not grant enough space for the number
235. of PEJ view in the needed position and select the command Full image available in the Navigation section of the Partial Dynamic Ribbon image fimage image tendering Even if V Ray can find an automatic setup of the scene exposure sometimes it may be necessary to try some small size samples before launching the final process For sample image we suggest not to use a high resolution and quality setup as you could face long time rendering If you have a look at the section named Image Quality you see that there are 3 Image Quality different quality levels Low Medium High The greater quality you ask the Default options Application the longer it will take to render the image so at the beginning if you eee ete are not sure about illumination and materials setup it is better to try some samples using medium or low quality Illumination and exposure can be automatically adjusted by the Application click the button Automatic DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 43 Multiplier xi v 1515x852 Image Quality Default options Options Save Quick Step Guide For Printing Customized Pixel Resolution 1515 x 852 Show advanced options Automatically shut down the PC when done Panorama TalkImage Size Create job Panorama You will open the rendering preview mask where you can choose the exposure typology Before proceeding note that in this mask you decide whether to create a rendered image cli
236. on inside the room and selecting the command Add to components The application will ask you to name the template so that you will be able to search it later on within the Room component window using the search field at the top As you already know you can double click over it in order to create a new project starting from that shape template Note that a room template contains the room floor and walls only it will not include the covering materials and or 3D Objects Furnishing elements eventually available inside the original project DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 47 Chapter 1 Layout How to move With your mouse You can move the room layout in the desktop of your application using the mouse controls By rotating the wheel mouse button you can change the zoom of the project When you Zoom In you will notice that you can miss the part of project you are interested in With the next mouse movement you can learn how to move the desktop again in order to see what you want FD By keeping the wheel mouse button pressed and moving the mouse you can pan Pan your project means to move IP the desktop sheet in order to see the part of the project you need to focus on Pan is usually useful when you have zoomed in the project and you re missing the right area of the project y If you double click the left mouse button inside the room layout you will Zoom MAX the project that s to say that 2 you will see all the project extension T
237. ore blurry Decreasing this value makes global illumination more noisy but less blurry The larger the Samples value the greater the rendering time Advanced Log if it is enabled application will create a log E avanzate file containing all details of the rendering This file could be useful also in order to send Maticad s support team the image log so that the team will be able to understand the way you created ee the image Portal multiplier 1 Portal samples 16 FG map prerender if enabled application will portali white W generate an indirect illumination map for the Filter 1 r scene at a lower resolution in order to get quicker renderings FG map is the indirect light map quality Final Gather meant on the percentage of the image dimension 25 probably is the best compromise between quality and time to render This value affects the first rendering step low values allow you to have a quicker first step but getting less information regarding diffuse light in the points of the scene DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 123 Chapter 5 Rendering Portal lights allows you to enable disable diffused light generation property Doors windows holes all around walls will become a sort of natural light emitters towards inside the room This is a very good option in order to illuminate the scene with only natural light and without any artificial light The former light in fact is really better than the l
238. ou are not selecting the needed object maybe the observer is currently out of the room Step forward and enter the room or change the point of view and try again Rotate You can rotate the object in the Layout window when you are moving it Click the right mouse button on one of the object lines and select the command Move start moving the object and rotate it with keyboard buttons and steps by 45 or R for customized rotation angles as already seen in the paragraph Placing objects in Layout Copy Duplicate You can copy duplicate an object in the Layout window Click the right mouse button over one of the object lines and select command Copy Finally move the new object and place it in the correct position You can also use a quicker way just clicking the left mouse button over the object while keeping pressed the keyboard button Delete If you are in the Layout window you can delete an object by clicking it anywhere in the object with the left mouse button in order to select it then pressing the keyboard button Alternatively click the right mouse button over one of the object lines and select command Delete If you are in Navigation window click the right mouse button over the object anywhere in the object and select command Delete DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 64 Chapter 3 Elements Change object size Resize You can change the size of an object by getting to the Properties mask click the
239. ou can use the left mouse button in order to quickly split the wall even if you know that the mouse is hooked to the grid snap unless you press the s keyboard button as you will see in the last section of this Chapter Indeed if you want to be more accurate when splitting the wall instead of using the left mouse button use the mouse just to refer to the wall to be divided than type the distance between the new corner and the existing ones You already know that by clicking the keyboard button you switch between the left right distance the highlighted filed is the active one Don t forget to look at the Application status bar if you do not remember the unit measure you are currently working in Finally it is important to notice that if the wall has already been tiled by splitting it the Application will remove existing tiles and the wall will become empty again For this reason it is important to decide how to manage the room walls before starting laying down materials Subdividing the room Sometimes you need to place inner walls and doors inside a room you have already created An option you have is to draw an object the inner wall s and place it inside the room but you will not be able to place doors on them so we discourage you working that way For this purpose you can use a new feature available starting from DomuS3D Pegasus that allows you to divide a room Say your current room is like the one you see in the left image yo
240. ow can customize the templates collection When you draw a room next sections will let your learn how to do it and you want to save it in the Rooms templates you just have to right click inside the room and select command Add to components the application will ask you to name the template and this is it We strongly encourage you using the templates as they will soeed your process when engaging a new customer in the This is one of the most used Components hence we encourage you setting the visualization options you prefer In this panel you can browse the tiles and any other covering material available in your internal library also called database In this section we take care about the visualization on the Tiles Component as the other controls will be described in the next chapters If you click the Options button at the bottom of the tiles you can decide which way to scroll the tiles content in the Filters section this is an important options decision in order to quickly find the tiles you want to work with Filters Probably the most used setup is the one you can see vV Manufacturer in the image on the right By selecting this option you will see the Colecon Manufacturers list first once you select a Manufacturer you will see its A Collections list finally we f Colore 16 the formats available within the selected collection a a olore Suinnlier DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 30 Initial ope
241. ows you to change the language of the program If you have a Client Server version it is important that ALL CLIENTS will refer to the same language and unit measure Different setup may cause program malfunctions DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 21 Initial operations and configurations settings As soon as you install the software it is worth to have a look at the commands available in the FILE group HOME LAYOUT CAD VIRTUAL NAVIGATION TOOLS DA 5 Recent documents WebPlanner 3 Ctrl 0 H Save project Ctrl S LA Saveas Ctrl Shift S Ctrl F4 Attachments ne Properties Ctrl D Fe Share Ctrl H Print i7 Import Export Ess Options Close application As you can see you have several options available in this mask creating new projects opening and saving existing ones deleting projects from the internal database adding documents to the projects it is possible to include emails PDF images and whatsoever file to the project so that you can find pieces of information later on when you ll need to recall any detail share your project over the Internet and your iPAD Android tablet Import and export projects Open the Properties Options section It is important to spend some time on the Properties panel of the application because it is the place where you can configure your application behaviour We will see it very soon in the next section Default shortcuts This is t
242. p containing 4 tiles d Dothe same in order to add 2 decorative tiles over the first one Check that the Strip field is set to New and another 4 tiles identical to the ones of the first strip Any time you create a new strip you should see on the wall the height the strip starts from and ends to including grout If you made a mistake you can roll back operation deleting last strip Do this using this button ES The result you have achieved should be similar to the one available in next image DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 184 The Sample Project Tutenial cop SOBRE Eyl Lad th iE oO 4600 oe Let s save project by selecting the button on top of the Ribbon Ca or clicking the keyboard buttons EJE e Do the same in order to tile the intermediate walls between the countertop and the shower box we have used 10 tiles so you have to type this value in the H row field Moreover you should move the point of view in order to see any wall before tiling it For your information in the small wall near the countertop we have right aligned the tiles so that cuts will be driven to the corner f Do the same for the door s wall too i gt Bagno Tutenal cap X Nawiqarione virtuale x Let s save project by selecting the button on top of the Ribbon Ca or clicking the keyboard buttons S DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 185 The Sample Project g Now move the point of view so that you can see the wall siding t
243. p up Move strip down Modify strip origin Change Grout Modify tiling Copy tiling Paste tiling Delete tiling Create off shaded effect Extend floor tiling Delete image Tiles layer Activate laying Options Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials Delete the floor coverings You already know that if you lay down a new floor over an existing inal fa gt fe one the Application takes care of removing the former one for you What about if you need to definitively remove the current floor A E Tile room coverings without applying a new one When you are in the Ei 52 Change tile series Navigation window click the right mouse button on the floor and pm iting Delete select the command Delete tiling In case you have a multi room Wall project you can delete the entire project s floor by selecting the Delete button you find in the Navigation Wall section of the Ribbon see image Check the Floor and Furnishing elements controls and click OK Note that Furnishing elements has to be checked in order to delete the doors sill coverings this procedure indeed will also delete the coverings on objects such as countertops steps etc So be careful not to check Furnishing elements control if you have some coverings on objects too and you want to keep them better to manually remove the sills coverings by clicking the right mouse button over them and select Delete HOME NAVIGATION Change all floor tiles Suppose you
244. package http exchange maticad it Pub Sample_Project zip Hope you enjoyed the Sample Project Please report us if this has been useful for you or ask more Sample Projects by writing your comments to wishlist domus3d com DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 191 Appendix Part 5 Appendix Frequently Asked Questions FAQ Introduction In this section you can find solutions to the most frequently asked questions In case you have a problem with your application try checking this section before contacting the Support Team FAQ have been divided in sections so that it s easier for you to locate the correct group Installation Upgrade Issue Solution Is it necessary to insert the key No itis not First install DomuS3D at the end of installation connect the USB Key _ before installing DomuS3D as DomuS3D installs the up to date driver for the key ERROR during system component Restart your PC and try again Be sure to login the PC with Administrator privileges installation If the problem is related to SQL Server and you re sure that no other software is using SQL Server you can uninstall it in Control Panel and try again to install the Application Hardware key update using V2C file Be sure your Key is plugged into the USB Port Run MATICAD Key management from the start menu and select second tab Apply License update Browse the PC and locate the v2c file The update by clicking the Apply Update button How to sa
245. ple pricelists available in the Appliocation s database DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 163 Chapter 7 Database esente_iva0 SI if VAT does not affect the item NO if VAT has to be calculated alphanumeric maximum 2 characters aliquota_iva0 VAT rate numerical 1 decimal place maximum separated by a dot prezzo_base00 primary price double prezzo_base01 secondary price double Set to 0 if not used prezzo_base02 Third price double Set to 0 if not used tab_sco_agg0 Discounts or surcharge table alohanumeric maximum 80 characters This field contains a list of discounts or price increase the user can refer to at the project level and at the level of a single estimate record The field can contain up to 10 values each one separated by a semi colon Every value even if it is integer should be written as a real number that is to say with its integer and decimal components e g the whole number 15 should be written 15 0 The character separating the decimal portion from the integer in every number is the dot Surcharge is different that discount as it is a negative number See the following example 0 0 5 0 10 0 15 0 20 0 5 0 10 0 oo Nodiscount If you do not want to use this table set the value 0 0 The fields marked with an asterisk have no effect on the program it is necessary to enter them for compatibility with the structure of the record tracing
246. ponent section For this reason it is important to fill in the correct information in fields such as typology manufacturer name description etc as they will help you later on searching again your material It is very important typing correct text rather than just non sense characters In case you will need to modify the material in the future you can select the command Ribbon gt Database gt Element materials gt Modify selecting the material you want to change but you can also double click with the left mouse button the image of the material in the Components window It is evident that we warmly encourage you using this second way as it is dramatically quicker than the first one Main Parameters Diffuse Color L 127 127 127 Description Roughness 0 Reflection Reflection Color I 0 0 0 Destination Element Reflection Glossines 100 Type VRayMt Glossiness Quality 3 Fresnel reflections Typology Fresnel IOR 1 60 Preset Refraction Maps Automatic map scale 250 00 Diffuse Map Texture Activate C File Reflection Map Refraction map Bump Map Displacement map Advanced parameters Name Manufacturer GENERIC DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 103 Chapter 5 Rendering Type in the name of the new material select the typology Wood Marble Metal etc it refers to If you want to start from an existing material and duplicate it ina new one you can select the type it refers to Arch amp Desi
247. pplication or emptied by tapping the corresponding operation button If merge option is selected the application baskets content will be merged with the server baskets content otherwise the server content will be overwritten after the upload operation similarly the application content will be overwritten after a download operation Each basket can be renamed by tapping its label DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 173 Chapter 9 Modular Furnishing Module Chapter 9 Modular Furnishing Module A amp Note at the moment of writing this manual DomuS3D is integrated with 2 different modular furnishing N systems IMOS Net by IMOS Germany and ArredoCAD by Dinamica S r l Italy This chapter refers to ArredoCAD Get in contact with Maticad if you need to use a different technology among those available for integration The way it works Starting from Pegasus version DomuS3D gives you the opportunity of creating modular furnishing elements In order to do that indeed you need to process and install a third party technology optional and not included in the standard DomuS3D price Once completed the installation DomuS3D Pegasus will allow you to use such software inside the DomuS3D window benefiting of the modular furnishing technology in order to create compositions to be immediately used inside DomuS3D So in a way you will still keep on using 2 different software but the real advantage for you is that they are combined in a
248. ps TS EA und O Creat v Redo Together with the look amp feel a great piece of oom Bi E Sove project news it the availability of Application shortcuts More Commands such opportunity will speed up the efficiency while planning Minimize the Ribbon Live page Show Below the Ribbon Layer Move to management Current Layer Layer New Nuova item composizione Furniture Units a amp Manufacturers J DY gt Customers v as ae Tile Import Labor material amp Supplier Internal material Exporty management Manufacturers price list price list Finishing Labor materials Details Pricelist Customize Press new shortcut key The download engine has been empowered with a new module that allows you to download single items this opportunity will speed up your activity when you re missing an item and you do not want to download and wait for the entire collection catalogue In Release 2 scheduled at March 2014 Pegasus will provide an engine that allows the user to automatically download what s new for catalogues he she wants to be kept up to date automatically Dividing a room It is possible to divide an existing room in order to create inner walls In this way you can place doors even in the inner walls Of course the single room will be divided in two rooms hence the project will become a multi room project
249. r 255 255 255 Reflection Color 255 255 255 Reflection Glossines 100 Reflection Glossines 90 Reflection Reflection Reflection Color 255 255 255 Reflection Color 255 255 255 Reflection Glossines 70 Reflection Glossines 50 The grain you see in the reflection can be reduced by changing the G ossiness quality parameter with which you can decide the maximum number of samples used for the glossiness calculation Higher values mean more calculations and slower rendering process Low values mean a glossy and less defined reflection For most of the materials the suggested value is 16 Glossiness Quality 1 Glossiness Quality 8 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 106 Chapter 5 Rendering Glossiness Quality 16 Glossiness Quality If you check on the Fresnel reflections parameter reflection of such a material will depend on the angle you are looking the object at The real world out there tells you that all materials have Fresnel reflections generally speaking in fact you have weak reflections if surface is perpendicular to the angle of view and become more evident if the surface gets parallel to the field of view By changing the Fresnel OR parameter Index of Reflection you can control the intensity quantity of the reflection by that material We suggest you to use a IOR value not lower than 1 01 lower values are not physically correct if you want to simulate real materials Higher values will increase
250. r Save option as well as decide whether or not you want to switch off the computer at the end of the rendering process useful while rendering at night When the system saves image file as per your request a log file will be saved too in the same directory containing all technical information regarding the foresaid procedure parameters and options you used time for rendering etc It can be useful to save such log file together with your image in order to recall the parameters you used if in the next future you ll need to do again something similar Advanced options If you click Show advanced options button you can see advanced parameters Here s a list of them General General Antialiasing 3 Contrast 0 07 ee i Num reflections 3 Antialiasing reduces aliasing effect lines Num refractions 3 fragmentation in order to create really better Num max bounces 5 rar images even if time to indirect illumination render will increase a lot Activate 7 Contrast together with heade i antialiasing regulates samples number while Rays per point 500 generating the Interpolated points 30 rendered image if you decrease this value i e Num bounces 1 0 02 you have a better Photons a image quality We suggest you to change this Photon densitv snn value ONLY when antialiasing effect is not enough Num Riflections maximum bounces on reflecting areas of the scene used by ray tracing engine
251. r to features that are available in the same way in the SA and CS version in case of any difference we ll specify what s different in the Standalone compared to the Client Server version The Application is available on your market with different modules not all of them are included in the standard packages as they can be ordered separately even at a later time The additional optional modules will be identified in the manual with the following symbol gt If you have just upgraded from Antares version that is the Pegasus previous version it may be useful for you to notice just what s new in Pegasus version For this purpose check around for the sections banned with the following image as they refer to novelties in the latest version new Also if you want to have a quicker list of the news refer to the dedicated Paragraph later on this section Bey This image means that you have to select the object entity with 1 click using the left mouse button Ra This image means that you have to double click the left mouse button over the object entity This image means that you have to select the object entity with 1 click using the right mouse button This image means that you have to rotate the wheel mouse button if any in order to achieve the suggested action IP This image means that you have to keep pressed the wheel mouse button if any in order to achieve the suggested action Drag amp Drop We will often talk about Drag
252. r to the opposite one Of course you will need to use both left and right button the left one will set the direction while the right one will really let the observer walking in the scene Gamers are used to move with the mouse in addition with the keyboard buttons especially Ww Al 5 D DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 41 Quick Step Guide Tile the floor With a single tile solid pattern From Chapter 4 Open the Navigation window and select the Tiles section in the Components window Search the tile you want to apply on the floor Before dragging the tile to the floor check the tiles control panel in order to 1 Set the operation mood on the floor button EN mi Ha 2 Set the grout value and color you need for the floor Grout for E Rotation 90 0 v 3 Set the destination to Current room H rows Strip New v Now the Application knows where you want to apply the tile so you can click the left mouse button over the tile image drag amp drop it over the floor Live x Layout Dinal x Bie Components ah BE Cem eA BEE None 60x60 PROJECTS COLOR FORWAR AVORIO STRUCTURE ROOMS ILES CONCEPT BIANCO RE q PHOTO2D MATERIALS FURNISHING ELEMENTS PANELS LAYINGS rotation or grout and apply it again The Application will take care of automatically deleting the old floor and change it with the new one If the tile has been loaded in the library with more than one image the Application will take care of
253. rations and configurations settings Always remember that you can still use the Search field in order for example to search an item using its description or even typing the format you want to work with or the Manufacturer name in order to temporarily hide the other catalogues Click CANCEL to reset Search criteria and see the full library content again By double clicking a tile image you access the modification mood where you can change ANY property of the tile such as item code description collection name or also price material in the advanced section You will learn later on in the guide how to create new tiles on your own We suggest you to practice with the search criteria in order to empower your ability of finding the needed items in just a second The way the Search field works is very similar to Google Search field These are some examples of tiles search Text typed in the Search field Manufacturer name or part of it eg Maticad Mati Collection name or part if eg Naturae Natu If there are available similar collection names such as Naturae Glossy Naturae outdoor Naturae Slim by writing just Naturae you will list all of them 30x30 Format Results given in the Components window You will see just the tiles available in the given Manufacturer catalogue You will see just the tiles available in the given Collection sometimes it may happen that the same collection name or a part of it is
254. re As the new copied material is available you can assign it to any object in the layout selecting it and clicking button you will be asked to select the destination object then one or more layers on which to apply the given material button of course allows you to remove the material from the list of project materials This procedure will NOT delete also the material in the internal database if any Also notice that if maemae the material is still assigned to one of the project objects you ll not be able ym Sy ee ere to delete it In this case you have first to remove material from the objects sii bir T you formerly assigned it to cms Reflection z In order to quickly use most common materials features you can also right Redecien Celor J 208 258 298 click the mouse button over their previews to get the context menu Fast GMp Stal haina Refraction Maps Diffuse Map Texture Actiy ate containing these commands File Textures MATERIAI Scale 250 00 Managing materials from application database i Reflection Map L U e plover v Ruma Man Cancel In case you want to setup your own materials we suggest you to do it inside the application database If you work over a material while inside the project in fact this modification will not be available for further projects Database gt Materials commands allow you to create modify delete existing materials in database Most of the fea
255. re which is equipped with the Setup DVD and should be installed on the Server together with DomuS3D in case it is missing it can be separately installed from the Application DVD Maticad Application Manager does not create an incremental backup but a complete backup of the Application data Server Administrator can also use standard Windows applications and techniques for backing up not only the DomuS3D but also the Operating System We warmly suggest you to plan a daily or weekly backup of your data DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 158 Chapter 7 Database Tiles Create your own single tile You can create your own tiles adding them to the internal library provided that you have the tile image together with the item details In the Ribbon get to the DATABASE section and in the Tiles group select the command Tiles management New You will approach the mask that allows you to create a new tile or even modify details of an existing one H r lt Tiles _ Item code Description r 16V02AVOT 02 AVORIO NEUTRA MOSAICO 30X30 Supplier Supp Code CAS Collection A VETRO v Format Image file Fill in the tile details such as item code description collection name Provide a manufacturer code by selecting button marked as A in the image you will access the manufacturer codes mask where you can select the manufacturer the item refers to If it is the first time you use
256. re memory RAM available for the computer as the size of the during rendering usually in 32 bit project is too big for your computer There are 2 possible solutions try to launch systems the rendering without opening the Navigation window in the layout window press F3 Views Management select view and click Rendering This will save some memory If still it is not enough try reducing material images size In the Layout DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 195 Appendix window go to the Tools group of the Ribbon select Stats button and check the _ biggest images this project is using try to reduce them a bit Wrong tiles color in the rendered Try to check advanced material settings Perhaps you forgot to apply advanced image how to adjust it material on your tile Try to check your artificial light too They has to be _ photometric lights Don t use physical base light Grey color on the sanitary ware how Try to check advanced material settings Perhaps you forgot to apply advanced to adjust it materials on your own tile as it can reflect sanitary ware color too This defect _ anyway has been solved in later versions of the program Rendering image is completely dark Try to change exposure value Click the Photographic button in the advanced rendering settings and change exposure Also check if there is any light coming from _ outside Refer to Chapter 5 Rendering How to create a stereoscopic Switch on stereoscopic renderin
257. ready know DomuS3D is the leading interior design technology for the Ceramic Tiles Covering materials Sanitary ware and furnishing industries with fairly 25 years experience shared with the most important Manufacturers and Points of Sale in the world It is for this reason that together with the software you have the opportunity of taking advantage of the widest collection of libraries Our Catalogues Department works day by day in order to share new and trendy items with you so that you can speed up your design process for your customer in Maticad we know that the wider elements and tiles catalogues you have the quicker and more successful you ll be while planning Moreover DomuS3D Development Department is always on in order to let the software evolve benefitting of new technologies for the interior design for the foresaid markets All this should make you feel that you ve done the right choice for your business Our goal now is to start siding you while training on the application so that you will soon be ready to use all the power DomuS3D is able to grant you Thank you again for your choice enjoy your DomuS3D Pegasus Massimo Rossini Board of Directors MATICAD s r l DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide Table of Contents PO TEIS SO pee sce gate eae e cat ec S ets ceases ok EEES OEA EEE EEE 11 PRO aati AOE E AE A EE 11 ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL vosesriaoers oroni recent ane cnr aren nee n
258. real shadow penumbra shadows at the border of the light itself Soft shadows area lights if No effect is enabled you have a point light Once you disable it you re creating an area light which is able to create more realistic shadows If you enable Visible flag you will see the light emitter too otherwise you will see just the light beam If you are processing an electric bulb we suggest you to choose the spherical shape where you can specify its radius and the quality referred to the soft shadows quality in this case means how detailed you want the shadows to be seen More detailed more time for the image to be rendered Default value is 8 we suggest to switch from 16 to 32 if you want even more quality always keeping in mind the time you will have to wait for it Point light Area light Linear shadow Soft shadow If the light you are processing is a spot light its shape can also be rectangular specifying its width and depth as well as circular specifying its radius In order to place neon lights in the layout you need to specify a couple of points where the light starts from and ends to basically the length of the neon Neon light has to be configured as a physical light visible cylinder shaped and you need to specify its intensity and radius We suggest you to try using all those lights the experience you ll get using them and changing their properties along your design activities in order to test them a
259. reflection made by the object Fresnel reflections Fresnel IOR 1 60 Fresnel reflections Fresnel IOR 1 01 Fresnel reflections Fresnel IOR 1 60 Fresnel reflections Fresnel IOR 10 00 The Refraction parameters group allows you to customize the transparency of the material Refraction color lets you control the refraction quantity If it is white material is totally transparent If it gets to the black transparency disappears In the following images materials do not have any reflection so that it is possible to better evaluate transparency If you change Refraction color from black to white material becomes more transparent and Diffuse color gradually vanish If you use a real color and not a grey scale one material will assume that color too together with transparency in this case Refraction color is combined with Diffuse color DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 107 Chapter 5 Rendering aa m ree Oe 3 FA a a Diffuse Color E 21 137 170 Diffuse Color E 21 137 170 E 21 137 170 Refraction Color I 0 0 0 Refraction Color J 90 90 90 Refraction Coor _ 220 220 220 Diffuse Color 21 197 170 Refraction Color 255 255 255 i ga mar P Same as for reflection refraction too allows you to use a map in order to define which part of the material has to be transparent You already know that you need to check the Activate control of the Refraction Map group to
260. rendering DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 90 Chapter 5 Rendering Tempo Tascorsa OOOO 39 Duliding light cache 11 Tempo trascorso 00 00 50 Prepass 1 of 4 54 After 50 seconds f SPRA R ys ae sy Tempo trascorso 00 05 00 Tempo trascorso 00 10 00 Prepass 40f 4 63 Pause After 5 minutes After 10 minutes If not stopped RT rendering process could be infinite as the engine keep on trying to get a better image eS When you are satisfied with the image the image will be clean enough for you you can click save the rendered image by clicking this button Click this button in order to pause start the rendering process e g if you want to make more modifications and it is useless to force your GPU i Suar im Click this button in order to stop the RT rendering process Ol Click this button to zoom the rendered image depending on the size of the container window The slider allows you to dynamically adjust exposition without starting again the rendering process Next images show a rendering example using V Ray left and V RayRT right after about 15 minutes processing DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 91 Chapter 5 Rendering V RayRT image can be edit with a software such as Photoshop in order to reduce remove noise DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 92 Chapter 5 Rendering How to manage lights Scene illumination is one of the most important activities while settin
261. rfaces which are perpendicular to point of view 90 deg refl about reflection made by surfaces which are parallel to point of view Curve shape is the way the curve goes down while following the angle Anisotropy 1 00 Back Face Culling Chapter 5 Rendering Anisotropy Rotation 0 00 Translucency F Translucency Weigh 50 Translucency Color 178 153 127 BRDF By IOR fresnel F 0 deg refl 20 90 deg refl 100 Curve shape 5 00 Ambient Occlusion On F Samples 16 Max Distance 1 0 Do Details V Shadow Color Mj 51 51 51 Ambient Color ze 0 0 0 Fast Glossy Interpolation Interpolation Gric 2 Refl neigh point 2 Use high detail di Refl high detail d 0 0 Single Sample fre E Refr neigh point 2 Advanced Reflection Options Use Max Distance Max Distance 0 0 Fade To End Colo _Color To Fade To hc 0 0 0 Max Trace Depth 5 Visible area lights Skip reflections o e dv ed Refraction Of Thin walled Use Max Distance Max Distance Fade To End Colo a Color To Fade To J 0 0 0 Max Trace Depth 5 Do Refractive Ca F o lt lt s 00 Transparency prope a FG GI Multiplier 1 00 FG Quality 1 00 Additional Color Mj 0 0 0 Highlight Refl Balar 100 Reflectivity vs Angle 1 07 Reflection made by polished lacquered wood depending on view angle Es 0 deg refl 10 e 90 deg refl 100 For most of the m
262. right mouse button on one of the object lines or anywhere in the object if in Navigation window and select the command Properties In the Properties mask see next image change the size scale of the object and click OK You will now see that the object dimension is changed and optionally you may need to reposition it depending on those changes This way of changing dimensions lengthen shorten resizes the object entirely This command can be used if the resize operation does not affect the graphic appearance of the object a Measures Materials Modify 3D Miscellaneous Size Position Width X position 726 6 Depth Y position 58 9 515 9 Height Elevation 50 3 34 6 T Keep proportions Cox a Stretch the object Extend There are situations where the resize operation is not technically correct Let s think of a washbasin where you want to stretch the countertop only leaving the basin as it is In such a situation an extension may become useful Click the right mouse button on one of the object lines and select command Stretch The Application asks you to specify the part of the object you want to extend In the next image you can see the way we have operated a first click left one of the green area with the left mouse button allows Application to understand where to start extending from Then with the mouse you can tell the Application the direction you want to extend to in this
263. rip tiles to the entire wall Total wall tiles or wherever in the room Total room tiles Notice that this procedure can be used just when the grout size is greater than zero Moreover you can also apply textured materials to the grout such as Masonry Generic Putty Try out and see the result zooming the Navigation view very near the grout and you ll see the details of the material You have also the opportunity of changing the grout color using a free color from the Windows palette From the Navigation WALL CAD TOOLS DATABASE window click the right mouse button over the wall surface where you want to change Bg a Ea a gall the grout color select the command Modify tiling AA ral Vertical a as You will open a window where you can see the wall surface in 2D Open the WALL Eti Copy Ctrl C section of the Ribbon and in the Wall group of commands click the Modify button Finally select Grout color command The Application will ask you to specify the section of the wall surface you want to change click the left mouse over it and decide the color you want to use Last option is to specify if you want to change the grout color of the tiled area you pointed out only or the grout color of the all room Note this way of working will let you see the difference also if grout size is equal to 0 in this case in fact the Application draws a thin line in the 2D Modify tiling window so that blueprints for installers l
264. roject as you need As soon as a modification takes place in the project or if you change your point of view RT automatically starts again the rendering process As the RT rendering takes place in the GPU your design speed is not affected as it relies on the CPU Note at the time of writing tests have been made with NVIDIA graphic cards only Contact Maticad if you need further information on the V Ray RT prototype In the next image you can see the V Ray RT window while defining the rendered image DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 89 Chapter 5 Rendering V Ray RT Preparing global light manager cre va If you do not want RT to start again while moving in the scene you can click this button Differently every time you move or change project V RayRT automatically starts again rendering the new point of view RT rendering image at the beginning is not well defined but you will see that if you wait some time image starts getting more and more detailed Of course the more you wait the better the image will be V Ray RT oa V Ray RT ALTA ALTA sro fi A hra AAEE YATE BOEANS A AEGA IRSA Faye aa After 10 secons After 50 seconds p Sq x 3 E 2 After 5 minutes After 10 minutes In order to make a comparison here are the images you get on the same project computer by using the classic V Ray engine As you can see using V RayRT you can get a quicker idea of the
265. roughness the reflected light will have sum blur components Stones the Displacement map If you need more realism with materials whose surface is not regular such as stone sometimes it is useful to use Displacement Map currently available in V Ray only Displacement Map allows you to bring a flat surface to life even without using a complex 3D model for that material The following image has been rendered using the Displacement Map Oe ant aliens ye I yr r af a By controlling Length and Shift you can adjust the effect the former adjusts the extension of the displacement to be applied to the bright white areas of the map The latter involves the dark black areas lowing down the surface It is a similar behaviour of the Bump Map with the great difference that Displacement Map really creates a 3D emboss in the scene Such emboss will affect reflections and shadows too DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 115 Chapter 5 Rendering Next image has been calculated using a Displacement Map with Length 10 0 and Shift 5 0 In fact displacement first moves in front the bright areas 10 then engraves the dark ones 5 The result is that the grey part is the real surface of the material the white comes out and the black in All maps we have seen in the previous paragraphs can be assigned to tiles too the black and white behave the same way even including the off shaded images files with Following examples show you the
266. rpz_confezione 700137 0 DURAVIT ARRE D Code Bathtub corner 140x140 DURAVIT NR DN647205118 DURAVIT DN647205118 ARRE DARLING NEW BASE 2CASS 100x54 5 PINE TER BN OP DURAVIT NR PA03B PANTO ARRE Take walnut with glass PANTO NR VELUX40S VELUX VELUX40S ARRE VELUX Window with Seranda for self drilling roof VELUX NR DBA80 GLOBO DBA80 ARRE Docciabella Shower Tray 80x80 CERAMICA GLOBO NR Ml0442 420 0x420 0 0 MATICAD PIAS CREMA MARFIL 42X42 MATICAD PZ MI0256 340 0x560 0 0 MATICAD PIAS PALISSANDRO CHIARO MATICAD PZ MI0756 340 0x560 0 0 MATICAD PIAS GIALLO PERSIANO MATICAD DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 147 Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share Print the estimate The Application allows you to print the estimate in several ways Em In the estimate window open the ESTIMATE section of the Ribbon and click Print button as you can see Aq in this image Paper Web Print Layout Layout The print you will get is similar to the one you can see in the next image You already learnt in the Layout Print Introduction chapter how to customize the images and logos in Application printouts Reseller selected Maticad s r l ne f RoomusS Maticad Viadel Novecento n 17 ae 61122 Pesaro ITALY PEG ASU S Date 13 02 2014 Estimate n 11 Page 1 of 1 Designer Date validity Project amount EURO 0 00 Discount amount EURO 0 00 Mr How much is it Charge amount EURO 0 00 Project amount EURO 0 00 A U PZ 0
267. rrect value i Complete bathroom s object by placing the mirror taps and all other accessories you need in order to complete the scene DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 182 The Sample Project Always remember to save the project time to time by selecting the button on top of the Ribbon Ca or clicking the keyboard buttons HE Tile the floor 7 Floor a Goto Navigation window and choose a point of view where you can see the room from inside and floor is visible b Open LAYINGS section in the Components window search for Staggered c Select scheme called Staggered 3 this scheme randomly mixes 3 different formats In the lower part of the Components window select the Floor icon and check that destination is set to Current room Also check grout value and colour before proceeding d Drag the scheme and Drop it on the room Floor Live xX Planimetria Bagno Tutorial cop X igaz Componenti RM we 2 mf 2 re 3 i Ai PLASTRELLE VANI PI T h SES T il re MCO 016 I MCO 918 MCO 019 PHOTO20 MATERIAL ELEMENTI DARREDO PANNELU Opzioni EN IMMAGINI LUCI CARRELL Se ee Basket 3 Basket 4 isl ji o 3 g e This scheme is just a neutral one tiles are still missing and we ll soon replace neutral tiles represented by those strong colours in the scheme as you can see in the next image with the real ones These schemes are parametri
268. s When you open the Navigation window the Application will move the observer in the middle of the room by default the first point of view in case you formerly saved in the project one or more points of view From that position you can move by using the mouse buttons this way COR If you keep the left mouse button pressed the observer remains in the same position in the layout but the eyes head will move depending on the direction you are moving the mouse in If you move it forward the observer will look at the ceiling If you move backward the observer will look at the floor If you move left right the observer will rotate left right If you get lost and can happen the very first time you practice don t worry click the N keyboard button in order to Normalize the view which is to say restore the view at the original inclination ok The right mouse button allows you to move walk inside the room change the position in the layout If you keep the right mouse button pressed and start moving the mouse you will proceed inside the room If you move it forward the observer will go ahead if you move backward the observer will step back If you move it right left observer will move laterally Central wheel button is used in order to move the observer higher lower In this way you can easily change the elevation of the eyes Try to practice a bit with the mouse and become expert in moving a good exercise is to get from one corne
269. s a graphic change you re making to the object None of these graphic modifications will be revealed by the project estimate so keep this in mind if you need to modify the cabinet s price or material information Assign material to all walls and ceiling You can assign a material to the walls or the ceiling using the same concept you saw in the previous paragraph Nevertheless as you may have a lot of walls in the project that way of working might be time consuming That s why the Application gives you a way of assigning the same material to all the classes available in the project get to the Layout window and select the needed material from the Materials Group in the Components window for example Masonry gt Cement Drag and drop it in an empty area of the layout without interfering with any object line A mask will popup containing all the available generic classes of the project Ee CEILING FLOOR Cancel OUTERWALLS C Show all classes If you select INSIDEWALLS you will apply those material to all the internal walls of the project with 1 click The classes you see in this image refer to the generic architecture of the project but if you enable Show all classes control you can see also the classes available in standard objects DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 67 Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials Note most of the covering features are concentrated in the Naviga
270. s and furnishing elements flagged as MATICAD you need to register before getting to the download module In the image on the left you see the link you need to click in order to access the registration form Click here to become member It is in the home section on the left of the Live Page You need of course to have available an Internet connection we suggest to use this module only if you have a fast connection as catalogues may be sized also hundreds MB depending on what you select before downloading While in the registration process provide the correct license details related to your hardware key wrong or malicious information on the Company may result in permanently denying any download for the hardware key you are using When you submit the registration form an e mail will be sent to the email address you have specified that e mail is crucial to complete registration process In the next image you can see the e mail that you will receive remember to finalize the registration process by Ywww domusad 3 D clicking the link click here that you find in the e mail Subscription successful 5 Save username and password in a safe place and do not share them with anybody as they are your credentials in order to access the catalogues us3DE Domus c by Maticad P Iva IT 01181350412 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 35 Catalogues download Step 2 5 connect eae So Open again the Application go
271. s render jobs The rendering job Before getting deeper with Render Manager we need to understand what a Rendering Job is A rendering job is a zip file so a group of files containing all the information the Application or R M will need in order to launch the rendering process later on In the paragraph called Launch the rendering process earlier in this Chapter you have seen that in the Rendering Parameters mask you can decide if starting the rendering immediately in this case Application stops waiting for the rendering to be completed or creating a 360 Panorama 6 renderings in order to build up the Panorama or creating a Job see red lined button in the image on the left Even without using R M in fact DomuS3D can render many scenes in a loop by using the render jobs this is a very useful feature for example in order to prepare the rendering jobs during the day place them all in the same folder and render them overnight when typically the computer is free to operate Once the rendering jobs are ready close the project and select Start rendering job command from the Home section ae of the Ribbon You will be asked to locate the folder where you saved the jobs files and the Application will start the rendering process for all of them At the end of the process in the original folder you will find new folders one for each rendering each one containing the rendered image together with other files we ll describe
272. s window contains a spreadsheet where you can find all details about the items available in the project Live X Layout How much is it X ESU Update Automatic waste C Grouped by Room Preview Manufacturer Item Name Piece Waste M U Sold qty DURAVIT 700137 D Code Bathtub comer 140140 1 00 0 0 NR 1 00 DURAVIT DN647205118 DARLING NEW BASE 2CASS 100x54 5 PINE TER BN OP 1 00 0 0 NR 1 00 PANTO PA03B Take walnut with glass 1 00 0 0 NR 1 00 VELUX VELUX40S VELUX Window with Seranda for self drilling roof 1 00 0 0 NR 1 00 CERAMICA GLOBO DBA80 Docciabella Shower Tray 80x80 1 00 0 0 NR 1 00 MATICAD M10442 MARMI 42 0 42 0 CREMA MARFIL 42X42 85 00 J PZ MATICAD MI0256 MARMI 34 056 0 PALISSANDRO CHIARO i PZ MATICAD MI0756 MARMI 34 0x56 0 GIALLO PERSIANO i j PZ If you make any modification in the project remember to click Update button in order to see the up do date information about material quantity If you re dealing with a multi room project you can group the materials room by room If you click the title of any column you can change the order of the estimate records in this case you can order by quantity price typology etc If you click the column s title and you keep the mouse pressed you can move the column so that the order in the table is the one you prefer to see an example is available in the next page images If you click the right mouse button over a record you can see this list of commands NETE
273. sample in order to understand if you have found the correct setup Do not change too many parameters at a time otherwise it will be difficult to understand which one is changing your rendering Scale 0 1 10 it is the dimension the diameter that will represent to sun circle The default value is 1 If you increase the value shadows will fade away more softly Invisible if checked sun is not visible in the scene as well as in reflections even if its illumination effect remains DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 93 Chapter 5 Rendering _ Sun light Activate Multiplier 0 1 10 1 00 Scale 0 1 10 1 00 invisible E Soft shadow quali 8 Turbidity 3 00 Ozone 0 35 Sun light Activate iv Multiplier 0 1 10 1 00 Scale 0 1 10 1 00 invisible iV Soft shadow quali 8 Turbidity 3 00 Ozone 0 35 Soft shadows quality 0 50 this parameter affects the quality of the shadow s blur Upper values mean a higher quality even if rendering time will increase accordingly Turbidity this parameter affects the atmospheric dust quantity Turbidity affects the sky colour too especially when sun light has been disabled so that the global illumination is lighter e g if value is more than 10 shadows made by the sun nearly disappear Low values will let you see a very clear and clean sky with a typical blue colour and sun is sharped and well defined like the one you see in the mountains High values turn the sky colour on yellow
274. seen weakened rays will be indeed given by indirect illumination FG Metal material if you enable this check you re deciding that the color of specular reflections will be the same as the diffused color Suggest to enable it only when facing metal materials Refraction Transparency level is the parameter to be used in order to change the way object will use refraction If you increase so much this value the object could become quite transparent Refraction color is the refraction color This is a fast way in order to assign colors to transparent objects like glasses Refraction glossiness blur is an index of object transparency refraction intensity If you use 100 material will be completely transparent if O transparency will be blur affected Glossiness blur quality scale of the quality you need to achieve for blur effects If you increase this parameter results are more accurate but time to render will increase too Suggested value is something around 32 Index of refraction IOR this is a measure of the way a ray will be refracted when going through a transparent material IOR equal 1 allows you to have full transparency without deviation suggested when surface is thin slim and or you want to accelerate rendering time Differently these are commonly used values for this field DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 133 Chapter 5 Rendering Fast interpolate fast way in order to get blur transparencies Not to be used
275. ser Guide 189 The Sample Project 11 Setting up the scene illumination let s create a rendering sample in order to see how the scene looks like In the Navigation section of the Ribbon select command Full image Once opened the rendering mask select the Exposure control button should be set on Automatic then Generate preview it may be useful to increase preview resolution to 240x180 This procedure forces the Application to automatically calculate the exposure of the room considering the light sources it is the same procedure you follow every time you take a photo with a digital camera and the camera does it for you automatically If you think resolution is still not enough click Generate preview again or adjust Exposure value available in the properties list on the right In our situation the area very near the washbasins may appear a bit dark cause of the small wall of the shower box So as we need to adjust the scene a bit click Cancel so that the Application will not start the rendering process First move the light a bit click the right mouse button on the light and select Modify command Pick the light clicking the left mouse button in the centre and move it as you see in this image Finally double click the light with the left mouse button and set the light properties as you Can see in the next image do not copy the position in plan as your project may have different coordinates Electnc bulb a Paran in plan
276. ser Guide 198 Appendix Change strips height with tiles number You can change the height of an available strip of a wall by specifying the number of tiles you want to find in that strip In Navigation window click the right mouse button on the strip you want to modify and select command Strip height DTiles number The Application will let you specify the number of tiles you want to have in that strip and as soon as you change the value you ll see the result in the wall in the background Shower box corner This mask has been modified so that now all the fields are ordered with the best concept for the user you first select the tile specify the grout finally the number of lines columns Seems to be a little improvement while you will feel it is a better way of working with this mask eoi Cgi Ka i gt E aro o SSS Sede Naa ee i oases hs Use a panel Tiles layer For this mask too the order of the controls has been changed Use ties Use a pane accordingly sst 0 0 Grout 0 0 Rot M6UF DECORO Tiles layer info Draw Tiles layer and vertical tiling There s a new feature when you create tiled areas or vertical tiling both in Navigation or Tiling Wall window you can now change the origin dragging point of the area setting it in the center of the area click o keyboard button when you move the area or click P to get back to the border of the area DomuS3D
277. start menu and select the advanced tab Switch on from the empty there isn t project tiles previous old installation setting and click the Import button At the end of this DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 192 Appendix procedure it is safe to import again the standard catalogue from installation DVD by running DomuS3D and clicking the Load catalogue button from the Database Group of the Ribbon Select Import rar from the lt DVD gt lmport folder and proceed importing Starting application How can install the new version on a new PC saving my old data Install the new version on the old PC importing your database As soon as finished you can save a backup from the new installation version Install only the last new version into the new Pc and Restore the database Issue Solution Error starting program on a MAC Try to switch off Coherence option ERROR SQL Server does access denied Try to check SQL Server services Should be on and started not exist Or ERROR library mismatch resource Could be a registry setting There is a Lang key in the Windows Registry that contains the current language setting Check the Registry by launching Regedit exe If you are running a 32 bit Operating System open the node Computer HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE MATICAD DOMUS3D 14 0 Lang If you re running a 64 bit Operating System open node Computer HKEY_LOCAL_MACHI
278. sts the most relevant events registered by the application there including also errors encountered while working in DomuS3D Such information will be important for the technical support team in order to assist you in case of troubleshooting The Send file button automatically attaches and forwards the file to the technical support department when there is an active Internet connection and a mail client available on the computer DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 29 Initial operations and configurations settings Components window Let s now have a look at the Components window which is located on the left of the application desktop the Components window shows you the content of the internal library database of the Application In this section of the manual you will learn how to customize their appearance in the next chapters of this guide you will learn how to use the available commands while in the design process Projects ca Je GE te Grout O0 E Ratation 0 0 D estinstion Curerz room Align e It is the first tab starting from the top After Application setup it contains sample projects you can learn from Later on this section will let you see the latest projects you saved together with their layout preview If the project you want to load is listed in this window you can simply double click its image in order to open it again The search field located at the top of the window allows you to search a spe
279. supported 39 0721 26465 Email English and Italian languages supported support dinamicasoft com DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 176 The Sample Project In this pragraph we will guide you creating your first project in DomuS3D We will start from the very beginning of the project creation process listing and detailing all steps to follow in order to achieve the result you find in the next image advanced rendering quality It is a standard bathroom with a small wall as a separator between the shower box next image in navigation quality toilet area and the entrance where a double washbasin has been placed The unit measure we use is the default one coming with the European setup procedure that s to say centimeters Before starting let us say that there are more ways to get to the same result while designing the project DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 177 The Sample Project Consider our walk through just as a first reference for you and expect that in the future you ll achieve the same goal even in different and sometimes quicker ways Layout Here it is the layout of the project where you can notice dimensions and objects position 45 0 Q oO O q Q N 2 t az Q re 18 0 1 Creating the project a b Select command Create room in the Home section of the Ribbon or New from Live page Fill in the project details in this mask the only mandatory fi
280. t color Remember that by right clicking the text once saved in the project you can move rotate change it again or delete it Dimension once you have completed your room layout it may be useful to draw its dimension for printing purposes The Application can automatically create a dimension for each wall of the room by selecting the command Dimension Automatic Dimension and deciding if you want the lines to be placed inside or outside the room Indeed if you want to manually measure any detail of the layout you need to select the command Dimension gt Dimension select the needed configuration finally proceed picking up the starting and ending point of the dimension together with the position you want the dimension to be placed in the layout It is very easy to follow up the Application s instructions while drawing it remember that you can use any existing snap such as the grid snap existing objects or CAD entities sometimes it is useful to draw constructional entities in order to have available snaps in the project Remember that CAD 2D entities won t be seen in the graphic output of the project as they are just construction entities Save room in components If you think that the room you have just designed can be useful in the next future you can save it in the Room Components also called Rooms Templates and use it again as a room shape for a new project You can proceed saving the room template by clicking the right mouse butt
281. t effects As an example the next images let you see the same scene rendered with different IES lights If you look at the shape of the light in the technical diagram you can see the result in the rendered image also note that this is a closed room hence no sun or sky light is entering the room DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 98 Chapter 5 Rendering You can download new IES files from the manufacturers web site save them in the DomuS3D2010 Lights folder in order to see them in the Advanced mask of the light in the next sections we ll have a look at the controls available in this mask Multiplier 1 1000 this value will be multiplied with the intensity of the light for this reason we suggest you to change the intensity of the light rather than the multiplier spot penumbra this parameter is available just for spot lights It gives you the option of customizing the amplitude of the shading area The percentage value is referred to the angle defined by the spot If you want objects illuminated by this light to create a soft shadow effect light does not have to be punctual but has to be represented by an area area lights For this reason No effect is related to a punctual light while rectangular circular spherical or cylindrical refer to area lights and will create soft shadows The behaviour of area lights can be easily understood by looking the next images the left one represents a punctual light the right one an
282. t of the estimate printout basing on the selected template As you have an editor you can use all the Word power in order to change and customize the printout as you need You can print this window as well as export it as a docx file Note Application uses Word just in case you already installed it on your computer as Word is not licensed together with the Application If you do not have Word Application uses a similar editor less powerful word processor Note you can customize the templates to be used while printing Those files are contained in the folder DomuS3D Stampe we used maticad_modello_Preventivolmg_N2 neutral docx in the previous image If you have processed the technical support service you can contact Maticad if you want to create and customize your own templates DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 149 Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share Print As any Windows application DomuS3D allows you to print everything you see on the screen In every window you can use the command File gt Print as you can see in this image HOME WALL CAD TOOLS DATABASE T Open Ctrl O Hg Save project Ctrl S Print image E tik Allows you to select an image for ex jpg tif p Saveas Ctrl Shift S bmp ecc and print it out a Set printer Close Ctrl F4 a Allows you to select printer set up its properties and decide how many copies to Delete Customize printout T Allows you to customize print format Attachm
283. t to refer to Auld boteparl Desie al hotspots Click the right mouse button on the item in this case the floor tile and select command Add hotspot In this way you can select the hotspot color and the image you want to merge to the 360 Panorama by clicking that point FA Edit 30 P ori m Once defined the item details image or whichever graphics you want any time you click the hotspot in the panorama you will pop up the graphic details as you can see in this image Click over the image in order to close it and return to panorama Connect Panoramas each other Sometimes it is useful to connect more scenes panoramas each other this is the case when you want the user to see the project from different points of view or when you want to merge more rooms in the same panorama TouchFly editor allows you to do that First of all open the same mask you saw in the previous paragraph Click the button in order to load new panoramas The next image refers to 2 panoramas to be linked together DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 167 Chapter 8 TouchFly The first icon top left refers to the first panorama you imported currently it is the starting panorama and still the only one The second one refers to the latest you have loaded and it is still unlinked In fact the small icon you see on the top OF left corner of the preview image tells you that currently the panorama has not been connected with any other
284. talogue 166 Extended 360 Panoramas eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeererrrrrrrrrrrerrrrrererererrrreerererrerrerereree 167 Connect Panoramas edc h Othe si ccrcscensnvaccsorctacctencvuncensntacchesercediusntdaneenvcndanecssceess 167 SHARE THE EXTENDED CATALOGUES sseeesssesesetserettssrttsetttsetitsstittstetetseteessttesstesseteesereessrressrress 169 Create a playlist ran a a a a aed aata 169 Synchronize a Playlist on your tPA c ccsscvsessicrcscassecsvnssierssecsyesseiadorssensnedsaaeioosseeess 169 Browsing the catalogue in TouchFly fOr tPA ccccccccccccccccccccccccceesceeeeesseseeseeeeees 171 Basket the way you save needed items ccccccccccccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseesseseeeess 173 CHAPTER 9 MODULAR FURNISHING MODULE eeeesessssssssssscccocccccsesssssoosooe 174 TAB WAY UE WORK S aaaea irer EARE AET AAEE E E A 174 INSTALL AND REGISTER THE ADDITIONAL MODULE ccssssssesseseseeseseeseescseeeseesesscseesesecseessseeeeseeees 175 Download the setup A IV DD ob iach sich ascs aaa wield dia Wind ditvis Sed dni had vise a ietaadtvictenedanki 175 HOW TO USE THE INTEGRATED MODULE IN DOMUS3D cccssssssssseseeseseeseseeecseeseseesecseeesseeeeseeaes 175 Launch the integrated MOGUL Evidences ier eels esse sede telSeele Sei kebabs Snes E oh 175 Import modular composition in PVOJOCE eccccccccccccccccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 176 Change the composition eerie a ee nuenbentemenueatent 176 TRAINING CONTACTS AND
285. talogue you are just selecting the items you re interested in the cart is a container of selected items collections Furnishing Elements MATICAD Last update Nov 22 2013 JY SELECT ALL DESELECT ALL z ADD TO CART The real download procedure will start later on in step 4 Downloadable elements The following elements can be previewed and do Select the elements you want to download and click on ADL Once you have finished go to CART to import the selected elements ARCHITECTURAL DOORS FURNITURE LAMPS L_ ARCHITECTURAL DYNAMIC DOORS FURNITURE LIGHTING FITTINGS ARCHITECTURAL GEOMETRIC SHAPES FURNITURE MACHINE SHOP ARCHITECTURAL MASONRY ELEM FURNITURE ORNAMENTS ARCHITECTURAL STAIRS FURNITURE PERSONS L ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS FURNITURE PLANTS BATHROOM BATHTUB FURNITURE SPOT LIGHTING DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 36 Step 4 5 download catalogues Catalogues download CART As soon as you add items to the cart the section you can see in this image will be available in the left column of the Live page If you want to proceed downloading click the View button in order to access the final step As you can see in the next image in fact the cart view lists all the items you have selected while browsing the catalogues providing also information regarding the size of the download in MB ACCEPT THE FOLLOWING TERMS
286. terials to cart and proceed with download refer to Catalogues Download chapter at the beginning of this guide in order to learn how to download new libraries b Once finished with the Intonaco cappuccino search for a new material called resina resin c Inthe Navigation window move the point of view in order to see the countertop select Resina beige semilucida material drag amp drop it on the countertop visible faces top and front Let s save project by selecting the button on top of the Ribbon or clicking the keyboard buttons gt HMese eBta a DomuSdD Pegasas Nangarione virtuale Oone HOME BA VGATIOHE SIRUMENT DATABASE E f ann r Raserh amherst gr Ai p i k Cree inraragqanay ba brl centr levers i aa i Comber sort s i L al z ab praia 30 H E tr hs EE ET bemi Cambi Metta o fut Gibert lemagnt kmag immage Panone Fonds Apert bapana Cosfigeniteene Ledret Writ piastrella raemes oe Cerne Paume Luci Compiti pamises drumi 5i Tak naga fame vnin evimenti vibe iniriaie Co Ciera ae Componenti q hive x Pensats agag Tutora cop D E eni a E MINT ARIA PANMI MHE PTR ra BAe DUC ST MATL l i i sy A i Dpran DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 188 The Sample Project Rendering the scene with V Ray 9 Choosing the point of view for the rendering in case of very small rooms such as the one of the example it is really difficult sometimes impossible to render th
287. the most important items available in the scene such as tiles or objects furnishing This opportunity is available for user who have purchased the TouchFly additional module Refer to the chapter dedicated to TouchFly to learn more TouchFly module TouchFly is an optional module that allows you to synchronize the Application library with an App made for the iOS Refer to the chapter dedicated to TouchFly to learn more DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 157 Chapter 7 Database Chapter 7 Database Maintenance Backup procedure for the Standalone version Starting from Pegasus version DomuS3D is equipped with SQL Server Local DB This means that you can create a complete backup of your application by simply copying the DomuS3D folder Note It is important to close the Application prior making the copy of the files This procedure backs up all the Application and its content data so it is not incremental If you need to proceed with a restore make sure that the Application you re going to restore is the same version you formerly backed up We warmly suggest you to plan a daily or weekly backup of your data Backup procedure for the Client Server version As the Client Server version uses a SQL Server Express database you cannot backup the application the same way as the Standalone For the Client Server backup can be done on the server where the Database has been installed via the Maticad Application Manager softwa
288. the e learning section and use web based services We recommend siding the standard mouse with the new technologies for 3D navigation such as SpaceNavigator or SpaceMouse ref www 3dconnexion com this way you can use both hands in navigation window The first in order to move with the SpaceNavigator the second to manage items in the scene with the standard mouse We always suggest you to have a look at the web page dedicated to hardware requirements http www domus3d com en Public_Area Info_Area requisiti html Maticad in fact keeps that page up do date depending on the new technologies available and features of new DomuS3D versions DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 15 Introduction Installation procedure The program is provided with a protection hardware USB key also called dongle that must be plugged in on one of the available USB ports The installation procedure will install following components Microsoft NET Framework 4 5 1 Full Microsoft SQL Server 2012 Express SP1 Native Client Microsoft Solver Foundation Bonjour Service Hardware key drivers DomuS3D Application Here is the step by step guide in order to install the program 1 Check if you have administrator privileges on the computer differently some parts of the installation may be not allowed faulty or even partially installed If no username and password is required when logging in Windows this would usually mean that the
289. the list allows you to see the format in the unit measure you currently have selected for your Application centimeters in the left image inch in the right one The right column of the list gives you the dimension in millimeters that is the real unit measure used by the Application while in drawing procedures and calculations Select the format and go back to the previous mask if you want to set also the price of the tile click the Advanced button to access price section If you click OK you save the new tile in the Application library from this moment on you should see it in the Components window Note if you double click a tile image in the components window you will automatically open the tile properties mask so that you can check or change the item details as well as open the folder where the tile image is Load multiple tiles with 1 click It is also possible to load in the Application thousands of tiles with just 1 click This feature is usually dedicated to Manufacturers who can speed up their process exporting all the data from the ERP system and automatically import them in DomuS3D in fact this is an optional module and your license may not include it check if it is available by selecting command called Import Export gt Automatic import in the Tiles group of the DATABASE section of the Ribbon You can load multiple tiles preparing a folder that contains all the tiles images even divided in sub folders for example one for eac
290. the program and as an optional has to be processed separately paying an annual fee In order to evaluate the module before buying it anyway you can refer to MATICAD manufacturer which is free and not linked to any subscription In the next sections you can learn how to register and download content from the Cloud Terms of use Some of the catalogues can be downloaded ONLY if acknowledged by the Manufacturer himself This means that we cannot grant you access to all catalogues you see available on DomuS3D web site as for those that are locked the Company itself will confirm your download request For those catalogues Manufacturer is the ONLY responsible of download authorization and MATICAD cannot be held responsible for any reason in case you will not be entitled to download As you process the module you agree about sharing your details and information license address with manufacturers involved in the download module MATICAD is not responsible in case of delays while waiting for access to the catalogue and or in case the catalogues itself is not complete at the time of download as MATICAD depends on the Manufacturers material availability Downloaded catalogues can be used ONLY inside DomuS3D Any other improper use is forbidden included selling or providing it to any other third party in any format How to use the Catalogues Download module Step 1 5 register Unless you want to download the free material tile
291. this manual the current address is http sketchup google com 3dwarehouse As you can see there are many thousands of items available for any room type Search the one you need download and save the COLLADA file DAE file extension Once saved the file in your computer follow up the instructions you have see in the previous paragraph locate and load the dae file in your project Usually external files are simple 3D files and do not have any material associated to their layers Later on in this chapter you will see how to assign new materials to the available sections of any object Note that some dae files may not appear properly in the Navigation and or rendering image this may be caused by the design technique used by the designer In these cases usually it is enough to open the file again with SketchUp and change it properly Drawing with CAD 2D tools In chapter 1 Layout you learned how to draw closed shapes by using the 2D CAD Tools We saw it in order to draw a room The same concept can be used in order to draw simple objects such as a countertop a step a base Once you have designed a closed shape with 2D CAD Tools click the right mouse button over one of the shape lines and select command Create object Application will ask you to specify the height of the object its elevation from the floor the basic color that indeed will be overlapped by textured materials if you ll apply them later on As you click OK button you
292. tion window in order to let you plan your schemes in 3D There you can locate and operate on the surfaces you need to apply the materials to This means that if not specified we refer to commands and features available within the Navigation window Cover the floor With a single tile solid pattern Open the Navigation window and select the Tiles section in the Components window Search the tile you want to apply on the floor Before dragging the tile to the floor check the tiles control panel in order to 4 Set the operation mood on the floor button Tet SEE 5 Set the grout value and color you need for the floor Grout 01 Rotation 90 0 6 Set the destination to Current room H rows Strip New 7 Now the Application knows where you want to apply the tile so you can click the left mouse button over the tile image drag amp drop it over the floor r Live X Layout Dinal x Components JE C5 we REE E None 60x60 2 SN AVORIO STRUCTURE COLOR FORWARD gt ROOMS PROJECTS D gt ILES CONCEPT BIANCO RE v Options Grout 0 2 C Rotation 90 0 H rows Strie q PHOTO2D MATERIALS FURNISHING ELEMENTS PANELS LAYINGS Destination Current room You should now see the tile applied on the floor If you made any mistake you can change some pattern parameter such as rotation or grout and apply it again The Application will take care of automatically deleting the old floor and change it with
293. to a certain distance Max Distance from this distance on referred to the current unit measure you selected in the application options you ll not see anymore the effect Fade to End Color if you enable this check reflection will fade assuming a particular color if disabled reflection will manifest environment you have around Color to Fade to this is the color reflection will fade to starting from Max Distance Max Trace Depth allows you to reduce interaction between reflection rays and the object When you reach for such interaction maximum limit material will behave as if you have enabled the options Highlights Final Gather only Visible area lights no highlights this options is exclusively referred to area lights Area lights are particular lights that are represented in the scene bya flash __ Soft Shadows area lights light that can be even too strong if you empower the light source Sii enabling this check allows you to avoid tough flashes with these lights Width Height Spherical 1 0 Radius Skip Reflection on inside most of m reflection effects generated inside objects are Ba Soft Shadows Quality so weak that you even do not appreciate them So you can save time on rendering just avoiding their calculation In this case enable this check in order not to care about internal reflections which is enabled by default Advanced Refraction Options Thin Walled it allows you to specify if the object
294. to confirm Then move the mouse towards the right type 82 e press Enter we re drawing the small wall that will divide washbasins area from the shower box area Do the same for the missing walls apart for the last one You can close the layout in fact by clicking the left mouse button over the first corner you draw or even by clicking the right mouse button anywhere in the desktop and selecting command Close tri 5 fe Save the project immediately by clicking Li keyboard buttons or the Ribbon command Save Say we want to modify the walls height click the right mouse button over any one of the internal walls and select command Height Type 270 and click OK project s height is now 2 meters and 70 cm Click the right mouse button over the upper wall the one that wil contain the window and select command Width Type 30 and click OK Doors and windows Let s place the door and the window h None x SEARCH lt ARCHITECTURAL lt DYNAMIC DOORS MANUFACTURER ALFA LUM ATLAS pane sliding ATLAS port cherry Blue door with glass Bring cherry board wi M bial Bring cherry with alun Bring embossed woot orev PRO Select the FURNISHING ELEMENTS section in the Components window select ARCHITECTURAL level DOORS or DYNAMIC DOORS level You will see now a list of available doors to choose from Use the cursor on the right side of the list in order to scroll down the doors list and click on Other results i
295. to find out the best Exposure value you have the control on it and can adjust later on as you need Switch type selector to Photographic if you are not expert in digital cameras you can control the rendering result by changing the parameters involved in the light passing through the lens aperture of the lens f number exposure time shutter speed and ISO sensibility film speed If you check the control Quick preview render engine makes just 1 calculation for the illumination taking the less time possible also in consideration of the size for the rendering The preset is very important in order to quickly find correct setup for the standard parameters in case of interiors exteriors daylight night time Exposure Control 160x120 Type Photographic Preset Select a preset y i Exposure Value 8 7500000212359 f number 8 00 _ shutter speed s 6 73 film speed ISO 100 00 Vignetting Saturation White j Quick preview Generate preview Vignetting simulates the effect you have in real life related to luminosity leak cause of the lens especially in the perimetric area and with maximum aperture of the camera A 0 value disables the effect DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 84 Chapter 5 Rendering Vignetting If you set Saturation to O you get rid of the Color Bleeding effect made by indirect illumination In fact in case of covering materials with strong colors such as red blue green etc the objec
296. to the Live Page fill in your username and password and click Login If you check the control named remember password you will automatically access the restricted are next time you run the application If you don t want the Application to automatically login next time you run it check the control named 7 Forget password Step 3 5 open catalogues By clicking the Catalogues link on top of the Live page you access the section where to decide which catalogue typology to get to Note that in this page you can learn how to understand whether or not a catalogue is alredy installed on your computer is freely downloadable locked by the Manufacturer etc The following image reports the possible catalogue status This is the meaning of the icons which identify the catalogues voues freely downloas Li Hahlo Aai 1 Catalogues which require authorization from the Manufacturer r alogues not authorized The Manufacturer didn t agree v Catalogues with mixed permissions Add ons that can be downloaded with catalogues Catalogues with extended informat W Catalogues with panels Move the mouse on Furnishing elements and select MATICAD or any other Manufacturer You will see a list of the available typologies in this catalogue You can select one or more of them by checking the little square on the left and click the ADD TO CART button INSTALLABLE In this moment you are not downloading this ca
297. ton referring to a martial already existing in database you will update the database version of the material with the new specifications made inside the project DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 120 Chapter 5 Rendering Rendering by using mental ray Launch the rendering process If you want to start the rendering process open the navigation window move the point of view in the needed or ead position and select the command Full image available in the Navigation section of the Ribbon Full Partial Dynamic image Jimage image Sometimes it may be necessary to try some small size samples before launching the final process As a sample image we suggest not to use a high resolution and quality setup as you could face long time rendering If you have a look at the section named Image Quality you see that there are 3 image Quality different quality levels Low Medium High The greater quality you ask the Default options Application the longer it will take to render the image so at the beginning if you Sania aie oe are not sure about illumination and materials setup it is better to try some Medium Quality samples using medium or low quality Multiplier xi v 1499x856 Image Quality Default options Exposure control Options Save Show advanced options Automatically shut down the PC when done Load Save Size a ie In the Rendering Parameters mask you can setup the rendering options you need
298. ts in the scene usually suffers a color variation by the light rebounding those coloured surfaces If you want to have warmer images you can increase this parameter Sarre m i my Environment Color type E 255 154 53 multiplier 10 000 00 Saturation 0 00 DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 85 Chapter 5 Rendering f narar aina A z amc type Color EN 255 154 53 multiplier 10 000 00 Saturation The White parameter allows you to specify which colour of the preview you want to be white This is sometimes useful in case for example you have sanitary ware which is no more white cause of indirect light reflections etc You can pick their colour in order to let the engine consider them as white in the next rendering procedure Color mapping group allows you to adjust parts of the image that are dark or bright too much You can choose among 2 different colour correction algorithms Linear algorithm multiplies the colours of the final image referring to luminosity creating high contrast rendering where it is possible to find burnt areas Exponential is more sophisticated and precise and applies different colour saturations depending on the available colours and their intensity It is useful as an example to prevent burnt areas near artificial lights Dark and bright areas can be adjusted changing dark multiplier and bright multiplier parameters dark muttipber 1 00 br
299. tton in order to enable left or right distance SUGGESTION we warmly encourage you working in the Navigation window as the Application already provides several useful features for objects and tiling Also Maticad will keep on enforcing the Navigation window in the next versions in order to let you find as many options as possible If you are working just with the mouse it is important that you first move the observer so that the location is visible in the scene prior dragging the object If indeed you are using the Space Navigator as well see Introduction you can get rid of the location you re looking at as the Space navigator will allow you moving the observer also while dragging the object That s a real amazing way of working with 2 hands in 3D and it improves speed to your work and fascinates the customer in case he she is looking at the project From external file DXF 3DS You have seen how to place objects in the scene picking them up from the Components window that contains the Application internal library But it may happen that you need to use external files downloaded from the Internet or loaded from DVD s In this case the Application allows you to load DXF COLLADA and 3ds files provided that they are 3D objects You can load those files into the project operating in the Layout window Open the Layout section of the Ribbon and as you can see in the image select the command Furnishing Elements gt From
300. tton in the materials mask When creating a new material you can type the material name and typology hence decide if the material will be a basic or an Arch amp Design one In this phase you can even load preset configurations from the database and modify them as you need ARCH amp DESIGN Materials Before talking about standard properties of Arch amp Design materials we need to focus on the physics related to the light which is reflected by a surface r N Material Main Parameters so te Diffuse Level 0 Destination Element X Diffuse Color E 0 0 0 Roughness 0 Type Arch amp Design X z Typology Reflection Level 100 Reflection Color 255 255 255 Preset Vetrotavolo X Reflection Glossir 100 Glossiness Qualit 8 Fast interpolate Fast no rays Metal Material Refraction Maps Diffuse Map Texture Activate Reflection Map Update preview 1 Refraction man Cancel Zaag Diffused reflection is regular and homogeneous in all directions starting from a linear surface spherical behavior Blurred reflection creates a sort of cone the axis of which is indicated by the specular reflection of the light Specular reflection is the mirrored ray of the light with the same angle between coming and leaving ray Blurred Specular Main properties Diffuse level talks about the applied map intensity and color This effect is linked to the reflection and transparency effects DomuS3
301. tures are really the same as described before hence we ll not repeat them again what s new in this menu is the export import procedure you can work with They are useful in order to transfer a group of materials from one location to another or to backup that portion of database in order to save your data Database gt Materials gt Export allows you to select a group of materials all of them if you leave empty all the fields of the first selection mask At the end of the procedure you ll find exported materials in the export directory of the application several directories containing images and text files materialimr txt and parametri txt containing technical data and properties settings about materials In order to import them in a second location copy all the content referred to materials in the lmport directory of the destination computer hence select command Database gt Materials gt Import You ll be asked to select the directory containing all files txt files additional directories containing materials DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 138 Materials for tiles It is possible to assign materials that s to say finishings surface materials to tiles and whichever covering material you already have loaded in the application database When you select command Database gt Tiles gt New Modify you get to this mask where you can modify all details about that tile You can find Rendering Material section where you can app
302. u already know you can customize those templates and use the integrated word processor in order to change them prior printing or creating PDF Select the Paper Layout command available in the TOOLS section of the Ribbon General optons Title iant image resolution Aas layout Monitor 96 DPT Desciptios Bagno Ambition Chic Mosaic Style Layout optons Preview Advanced options Project E Vane4 Destreton Project attachment file Ci Users yraseeno MATICAD Documents Project layout 7 docx P k Camel v Open iadefast editor In this example we ve selected Booklet n 10 template you can see a preview of the template directly in the selection mask prior proceeding IN the next image you can see the result of Booklet n 10 which is a one page template Views InsideWalls Bagno Mosaic Style ACRI 30 5x30 5 AMBITION DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 22 11 2010 Administrator Bagno Ambition Chic Mosaic Style 153 Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share There are templates indeed that will allow you to print project summary over multiple pages The next images have been printed by using Booklet n 6 CUSTOMER My Creme Bathroom CUSTOMER My Creme Bathroom w PROJECT Bagno Creme icad PROJECT Bagno Creme licad Floor Vano 4 s SES Sen CUSTOMER My Creme Bathroom CUSTOMER My Creme Bathroom PROJECT Bagno Creme PROJECT Bagno Creme Tiles Parete 40 CUSTOMER My Crema Bathroom CUSTOMER My
303. u can use the left mouse button in order to set the needed points rather than type the coordinates of the first point the distance and radius for the second one the value of the radius DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 46 Chapter 1 Layout 3 points the Application asks you to set one after the other the first second and third point of the arch Tangent point radius you need to select one of the existing lines to specify the tangent the point you want the arch to start from the radius of the arch finally the extension magnitude of the arch Curves this command allows you to draw the so called splines Splines are curved lines where the shape and the angles are made of consecutive points As you can see in this image the curve follows up the tangent line made up by the last point you are drawing You can stop drawing the spline by right clicking the mouse button and selecting the command Stop while Close will close the shape Continue will allow you to keep on drawing and Cancel will delete all the spline you are drawing Once designed the spline if you left click on it you can modify it later on just by picking the nodes of the spline the blue balls and dragging them up to the new position If you right click on the spline and select add you can create a new node in the section of the curve where the mouse is Polyline this is the same behavior of the Free hand drawing command you already saw while creating a new project in
304. u do with documents in Word changing texts images and logos for example placing your logo columns and tables and everything is needed in order to have the format you need O Company detailed data You can customize the information used by the program when creating printouts Usually we re talking about images and texts After the program installation the program uses DomuS3D and Maticad typical images and texts You can customize them in order to have your own logo Company name and details address etc Moreover you can load multiple Company details in order to print your projects for different brands in case you are working for a Company who delivers items with different brand names 1 Locate application on disk Sometimes it is useful to get to the computer folder where the program has been installed for technical support requests S Er in order to save your own tile images prior loading Jao p button the application opens the folder containing the o MESA them in the internal database etc By clicking this n A y root of the program 4 il 5 pa BE CAREFUL do not change alter or remove the program files in order to avoid program malfunctions mn u 4 fA un in on c im in tn Salem on on ce cm oon on O Blueprint for the installer Ji iP This section allows you to customize the technical printouts This image shows you some graphics effects you can
305. u want to divide it as you can see on the right image s o 220 0 E E TEE WME z t 4 SY SG WL Raos X 3100 TN A A A IEEE rnnt t SG RQ EEE KK E50 A AOOO U A A A g A 2 kA H A A N N 240 0 i RC E R Kai In order to do that click the right mouse button inside the room and select command Subdivide room You will have the opportunity of drawing internal walls the former room will be divided in 2 rooms and the project will become a multi room project The Application will try to keep the original tiling on place if any on the old walls and you will be able to locate doors and dynamic doors in the new walls in between rooms DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 51 UNDO Chapter 1 Layout It is very important to notice that in case you have made any mistake you can roll back to the previous state of the project by clicking the shortcut z as usual in every Windows application You can do the same also selecting the UNDO command in the upper left corner of the Application window as you can see in this image The opposite of UNDO is REDO the specular button whose shortcut is Y Shortcuts available in Layout window TAB S When you are moving objects or drawing new entities sometimes you have fields where you can start typing in order to be more accurate in your process In case there are more than one field you can
306. uS3D Pegasus User Guide 155 Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share Destination in this group select DomuS3D Box by e mail in order to send an email containing the attachment with the Panorama Of course the computer you re using has to have installed a mail Client such as Microsoft Outlook or similar On the device you will receive this email Froex DomuS30 Box 14 ebbewo 2014 11 2 Here s the Panorama wanted to share with you Loos forward to hearing your teedback Sincerely Mark t As you tap over the project image called panorama box a popup appears asking your to specify the App to use for this attachment Select Open in DomuS3D Box as you can see in the next image The App will raise and load the project locally so that you ll have it inside your device even if working off line L Uil AirDrop Share instantly with people nearby If they do not appear automatically ask them to open Control Center and turn on AirDrop SOIE Mail Open in Open in Open in Opel DomuS3D Box TeamViewer QuickSupport TeamV a 20 01 14 panorama box im tha Hii JI UI 14 30 01 14 ality Chan DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 156 Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share Advanced Panoramas DomuS3D allows you to connect multiple Panoramas in a single project so that you can share a multi room project Fh or even look the same scene from different points of view Moreover you can add technical details regarding
307. upport Team Support Team is available for you from Monday to Friday except for Italian standard vacation time from 9 00 to 12 00 a m and from 3 00 to 6 00 p m Italian time Catalogues Department Catalogues Department works every day in order to provide you the widest library collection possible You can download catalogues from within the LivePage if you have processed the Catalogues Download Annual Fee If you feel some catalogues are missing or incomplete write to catalogues domus3d com in order to report the Catalogues Department about those libraries we ll do our best in order to contact the Manufacturer collect information and data and share them with you as soon as possible Marketing and Sales Department Contact Marketing Department mktg domus3d com if you need to receive generic pre sale information offers and prices upgrade your current DomuS3D to newer versions or buy additional licenses join the Catalogues Download service join the Technical Support service book a Training session on site or remote order a Space Navigator ask for dedicated services Account Department Contact Account Department account domus3d com if you need to check your invoice or payment status check the delivery status of your order DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 206 Suggestions and improvements Wish List Last but not least As a valuable DomuS3D customer we take into great consideration your se
308. urage you to keep your Manual up to date connecting to the Live Page time to time and checking if any new version is available Organization of the manual This Manual is organized into five different parts 1 Part 1 The Software Setup and Configuration explains the hardware configuration we suggest you to process before installing as well as the procedure to follow up in order to install and configure the Application 2 Part 2 Quick Step Guide is a very quick summary listing the most relevant features available in Part 3 you need to learn to create a project Read this section only if at this stage you don t have time to read the all manual 3 Part3 The Software User Manual explains the state of the art of the Application It is the real User Guide as it covers everything from room architecture to 3D Objects management to coverings materials layout to rendering techniques to technical blueprints etc Read this part carefully to learn how to push the Application max of the power Part 4 The Sample Project is a complete step by step example of creating a standard project 5 Part 5 Appendices contains sections like FAQ and Troubleshooting guide that may be helpful in case of some difficulties while in the creation process DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 11 How to use this manual As an author who put a lot of work into this book we d love it if everyone who picks up this book reads every word from the first to the last p
309. ve C2V key file Be sure your Key is plugged into the USB Port Run MATICAD Key management from the start menu Click the Collect information button to save the c2v file Is DomuS3D compatible with 64 bit Yes DomuS3D is compatible with 32bit and 64 bit O S operative system Can install DomuS3D ona Mac DomuS3D is not available as a native MAC Application Indeed it s possible to install DomuS3D on MAC using a Windows emulator such as PARALLEL or FUSION or using Windows on a bootcamp partition Backup Restore database How to Please ensure there is enough free space in your disk Start the MAM Maticad save a backup from DomuS3D Application Manager software from the start menu and click the Backup button Select a folder where you want to save it and confirm to proceed This backup is not incremental hence the restore feature will overwrite the Application data with the one of the saved backup With the new Pegasus Standalone version if you close the Application you can also save the Application folder as it contains all data you need to restore the program on a new PC How can transfer data from my old Use Maticad Application Manager to save a complete Backup form the old PC and PC to a new one _ use again MAM to Restore it in the new PC have updated an older version to Try to import again the data from the old version run Maticad Application Pegasus but the installation is Manager from the
310. when you are working on a wall in order to move to the left or right one or back to the floor In this way you can change the operating area very quickly while remaining in the 2D window DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 80 Introduction Choose the engine Fi Chapter 5 Rendering Chapter 5 Rendering The Application allows you to choose which rendering engine to use among mental ray or V Ray They are the most A used and professional engines in the world and give you all the power to create stunning and totally realistic images If you are upgrading from a previous PRO version you have mental ray installed If you have bought DomuS3D Pegasus PRO you have V Ray installed as the default rendering engine In both situations you can optionally order and activate the second engine But in this case remember that you need to decide which engine to use when you create a new project as choosing the engine makes the Application setting up a different set of materials and effects that will be assigned to tiles and objects We warmly discourage you switching from an engine to the other once you have already created and settled up the project graphic results you will achieve may be unpleasant As you have already seen in the introduction in order to decide which engine to use go to the Application Properties mask select the command File gt Options get to the Navigation and Rendering Tab and choose the needed engine If the navigation w
311. will open the rendering preview mask where you can choose the exposure typology Before proceeding note that in this mask you decide whether to create a rendered image click OK a Job for Render Manager application or a 360 Panorama Leave the Exposure control to Automatic and click Generate Preview Application will start calculating optimized parameters and will give you a preview Preview resolution In order to create an automatic setup the Application needs to try some samples and calculate the illumination for this reason you will need to wait some time depending on the complexity of the project and the power of your computer it is the similar approach used by digital cameras when you set the automatic exposure In the next images you can see that Application tries different illumination setups in order to find the appropriate one DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 83 Chapter 5 Rendering Exposure Control Exposure Control Preview resolution 160x120 Type Automatic Preview resolution 160x120 Type Automatic Preset Compiling geometry 56 Generate preview Generate preview Exposure Control Exposure Control Preview resolution 160x120 Type Automatic Preview resolution 160x120 Type Automatic Preset Preset Compiling geometry 3 Merging light cache passes 71 Generate preview Generate preview Even if the Application tries
312. y enable the button tool tipped Change similar tiles A finally drag amp drop the tile inside the red slot this pattern is divided in red and green slots those colors help you understanding which parts of the pattern still have to be covered by a real tile Live Layout Penal H Camponents y PENJ F E None ROOMS Pairs 3 T a 5 F bi fal a w 3 8 i ka You will see that the dynamic pattern resizes depending on the tile size Drag amp drop the second tile on the remaining slot green in order to complete the pattern With more complicated patterns different tile formats it may happen that the formats you select are not compatible each other In this case the Application will notify you about the incompatibility and the list of formats in the Components window will let you see the compatible formats in green color and those that are not red color If you made any mistake click UNDO button or Z and drag amp drop again the pattern The Application will automatically take care of removing the old floor DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 69 Change the grout of existing patterns Chapter 4 Laying Covering Materials In case you need to change the grout of an existing pattern without applying it again you can click sng Change tile the right mouse button over the pattern and select the command Change grout Restore neutral tile Remember to specify the new grout value in coherence w
313. y possible only if your Processor and graphic card are very powerful typically Quad Core processors and fast GPU with at least 1 GB on board RAM for further information connect to the http www domus3d com en Public Area Info Area requisiti html page in the Application web site Refer to the Navigation section Chapter 2 for learning about the Advanced button Interactive elements is intended to enable disable dynamic elements in navigation window Those elements can move some parts layers i e dynamic doors and windows can be opened by clicking their handle dynamic furniture can open their door in the same way tiles displayers slots can be pulled out in order to see different panels or to assign tiles to each slot This check is enabled by default and does affect the navigation speed we suggest you to disable it just in case you do not want to rise such effect while pressing the left mouse button near dynamic layers Antialiasing option allows you to improve the sharpness of the image and reduce the aliasing effect segmentation of oblique diagonal lines This option forces the computer using more hardware resources hence it could make the 3D window a bit slower Wireframe navigation allows you to navigate the scene in wireframe mode that s to say just with the structure of the 3D objects without seeing their colors and tile covering material It can be enabled disabled from directly the navigation window selecting the keyboard
314. y you could insert values with decimal precision Overexposed areas allows you to manage the contrast between overexposed areas strong light in the image If it is less than 1 allows you to weak burn portions of the image if any Control is disabled if value is 1 differently if O you have maximum reduction Shadows controls darker areas level If you decrease this value you will light darker portions of the image Interval varies among 0 0 and 1 0 Vignetting is the photographic effect in order to have less light at the borders of the image If set to O you re disabling this effect Saturation saturation is the intensity referred to a peculiar color A saturated color is very bright and tough lowing down saturation color becomes weak and seems to get grey If you use the minimum for saturation color becomes really grey Default is 1 White white balancing value Standard value is RGB 255 255 255 real white If you use a different white you get a different chromatic image Gamma gamma correction is a non linear operation used in order to encode video luminescence Default value is 1 Lowing down this value image will become darker and more contrast based If you use Close button you confirm modifications if any and close this mask in order to get back to Rendering parameters mask Options In Rendering parameters mask you can find Options area where you can specify if and where you want to save the image you ll rende
315. you do not have any rotation 1 means that rotation is 360 Traslucency translucency is a kind of peculiar effect linked to transparency If you use translucency the application automatically enables transparency too Traslucency Weight it is the of transparency used within translucency You can use translucency with thin objects such as sheets of paper or tents Translucency Color is the color used for translucency BRDF In real life reflection you have on a surface always depends on the point of view where you are BRDF Bidirectional Reflectance Distribution Function is referred to this effect and allows you to define reflection behavior depending on the position you re looking from So many materials are linked to this effect in real life glass and water for example influence reflection angle IOR refraction index which we talked about before in this chapter In the same way you can setup the reflection angle through BRDF The most notable examples are composed of dielectric materials such as glass and water in this case the angle of reflection is closely related to the refractive index IOR Materials such as lacquered wood plastic etc show very similar characteristics By IOR fresnel if this check is enabled reflection mode is given only by material IOR differently it is possible to manually setup reflection angle following up a diagram you can find in next page 0 deg refl about reflection made by su
316. you just have to click over nstall elements in order to definitively load those items in your library You are now ready to use them in your design activity The elements have been downloaded and are ready for the installation Note the Application may ask you a confirmation in order to overwrite new materials over existing ones in your library They are the new materials download from the Cloud We always suggest you to overwrite all materials with new ones as the new ones could be better optimized for the rendering process The only disadvantage in this choice is that if you have formerly modified a material in your library you could loose your customization DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 37 Download of single objects new This option is available just with the Furnishing elements If you click over a typology you access the following page v TILES v FURNISHING ELEMENTS Y MATERIALS PHOTO2D CATALOGUES Furnishing Elements MATICAD ARCHITECTURAL DYNAMIC DOORS W Automatically overwrite already installed elements C Show only not installed elements t ADD TO CART PORTASC PO040 P0039 Porta scorrevole bianca Porta di ingresso Porta di ingresso PORTA002 RAO PORTAOO3 Porta con bugna vetro in rov Porta con bugna legno Porta a vetro all inglese DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 38 Catalogues download Here you can immediately check which items are already installed in your Application marked by Y But a
317. you should find the group you have just created Next time yov ll drag amp drop it in a project the Application will ask you if you want it to remain a single item or if you want to explode it separating the single items In the first option you cannot change the position of the items available in the group and the estimate will contain just one record In the second all the items can be moved or deleted separately and the estimate will report one record for each one of them DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 161 Chapter 7 Database Load complete pricelist in the Application database You already learnt in the previous paragraphs that you can set the item price in the Advanced section of the item details mask this means that you need to work item by item manually That s an easy and quick procedure if you need to change just a few prices while it ll be useless if you need to change the full catalogue price In order to set the price of multiple records you can create a text file naming it the way you want containing all details and load it in the Application database with just one click usually such file can be generated by the account software that contains both codes and up to date prices In this paragraph you will learn how to setup the text file for the pricelist automatic importation procedure Once the text file is ready you can import it in the Application s database by selecting the command Supplier pricelist gt Import
318. zation Markus Kuhlo and Enrico Eggert FocalPress This book contains examples 3 Online Official Documentation by ChaosGroup V Ray manufacturer http help chaosgroup com vray help 200R1 V Ray Italian books 1 V Ray Guida definitiva Raffele Vella Published by IMAGO Edizioni http www vrayguidadefinitiva com 2 VRay 1 5 La Guida Completa Terza edizione Francesco Legrenzi 3 3ds Max 2011 amp V Ray Elisabetta Cenci Published by MCGraw Hill This book is not specific on V Ray only It is dedicated to 3ds Max but includes also sections on lights and materials for V Ray 4 http www wikicg it wiki index php title Vray150R1 V Ray 1 5 manual Italian translation DomuS3D Pegasus User Guide 144 Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share Chapter 6 Estimate Print Share This chapter is dedicated to technical features that will allow you to provide the installer details about the way to have the job done Estimate Calculate the project estimate The Application can provide you the calculation of used materials If you want to open the Estimate window go to the Layout window open the TOOLS section of the Ribbon and click the button Calculate mu Sr wu Print Slueprint for Floor Walls blueprint Estimate the installer for the installer This command is available in the Layout Ribbon only A second way to open the Estimate window from wherever you are in the project is to use the related shortcut P Thi

DomuS3D® Pegasus User Guide 1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

DomuS3D&reg; Pegasus User Guide 1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

DomuS3D® Pegasus User Guide 1